Transfer Switches

5.1 Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview

Transfer Switches
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-2
5
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-5
5
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-5

5.2 Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

5
Open Transition, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-8 5
Open Transition, Service Entrance Rated, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-14
Closed Transition, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-21 5
Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-25
5
5.3 Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
Open and Closed Transition, Dual Drawout, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-29 5
Open and Closed Transition, Drawout ATS,
Fixed Bypass, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-35 5
5.4 Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open Transition, Manual Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-41
Open Transition, Non-Automatic Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-45 5
Open Transition, Automatic Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-48
5
5.5 Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-55 5
5.6 Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-65
5
5.7 Automatic Transfer Controllers
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71 5
ATC-100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-75
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
5
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-80
5
Controller Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-91

5.8 HMi Remote Annunciator Controller

5
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-96 5
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-96
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-96 5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-97
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-98 5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-99
5
5.9 Transfer Switch Features—Standard and Optional
Transfer Switch Features Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-100 5
Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-116
5
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-124

5.10 kW Conversions
5
kW Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-125 5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-1

Revision notes

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution, CA08100003E

Tab 5—Transfer Switches
Revision date Section Change page(s) Description
02/05/2018 All All Major overhaul to complete tab, all pages revised

02/08/2018 All All Revision date changed to February 2018

 5.1 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview

Contents
5 Automatic Transfer Switches
Description Page
5 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-5
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-5
5 Learn
Online
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5 Product Selection Guide
5 Transfer Switch Products

5
5
5
5 Catalog
Numbering
Contactor-Based
40–1200 A (up to 600 Vac) Contactor-Based
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based
40–1200 A (up to 600 Vac)

5
System 40–1600 A (up to 480 Vac) 1600–3000 A (up to 600V) 40–1600 A (up to 480 Vac)
Type AT = Automatic (open transition) AT = Automatic (open transition) BI = Bypass isolation open transition
CT = Automatic (closed transition) CT = Automatic (closed transition) CB = Bypass isolation closed transition
5 NT = Non-Automatic
Refer to Page V2-T5-8
NT = Non-automatic (open transition)
Refer to Page V2-T5-25
Refer to Page V2-T5-29

5
Orientation C = Contactor C = Contactor C = Contactor
Logic 1 = ATC-100 (up to 400 A only) 3 = ATC-300+ 3 = ATC-300+
3 = ATC-300+ 9 = ATC-900 9 = ATC-900
5 Mechanism
9 = ATC-900
C2 = In-phase only C3 = Time delay neutral (TDN) only
F5 = F type, in-phase/delayed transition

5
C3 = Time delay neutral (TDN) only G5 = G type, in-phase/delayed transition C5 = In-phase / TDN transfer
C5 = In-phase / TDN transfer
Mount X = Fixed mount X = Fixed mount E = Dual drawout
5 X = Drawout ATS, fixed bypass
Poles 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole

5 3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Amperes 0040 = 40 A 0225 = 225 A 1000 = 1000 A 1600 = 1600 A 0100 = 100 A 0600 = 600 A
5 0080 = 80 A
0100 = 100 A
0260 = 260 A
0400 = 400 A
1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A 1
2000 = 2000 A
2600 = 2600 A
0150 = 150 A
0200 = 200 A
0800 = 800 A
1000 = 1000 A

5
0150 = 150 A 0600 = 600 A 3000 = 3000 A 0260 = 260 A 1200 = 1200 A
0200 = 200 A 0800 = 800 A 0400 = 400 A 1600 = 1600 A 2
Voltage B= 208 V, 60 Hz H = 380/220, 50/60 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz H = 380 V, 50 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz H = 380/220, 50/60 Hz
5 E= 600 V, 60 Hz O = 415/240 V, 50/60 Hz
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz W = 240 V, 60 Hz
E = 600 V, 60 Hz
G = 220 V, 50 Hz
O = 415 V, 50 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz
E = 600 V, 60 Hz
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
O = 415/240 V, 50/60 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz

5
X = 480 V, 60 Hz X = 480 V, 60 Hz X = 480 V, 60 Hz
Enclosure K = Open D = NEMA 4X S = NEMA 1 S = NEMA 1
S = NEMA 1 J = NEMA 12 R = NEMA 3R R = NEMA 3R
5 R = NEMA 3R D = NEMA 4X
Listing U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed

5 Notes Key: DO = Drawout

FM = Fixed mounted
1 Up to 480 volts.

5 2 1600 A is dual drawout only.

MCB = Molded case breaker
MCS = Molded case switch

V2-T5-2 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview
5.1
Product Selection Guide
5
Transfer Switch Products, continued
5
5
5
Catalog Contactor-Based,
Numbering
System
Service Entrance Rated
40–1600 A (up to 480 Vac)
Molded Case–Based, Manual
30–1000 A (up to 600 Vac)
Molded Case–Based, Non-Automatic
30–1000 A (up to 600 Vac)
Molded Case–Based, Automatic
30–1000 A (up to 600 Vac) 5
5
Type AT = Automatic (open transition) MT = Manual (open transition) NT = Non-Automatic (open transition) AT = Automatic (open transition)
Refer to Page V2-T5-14 Refer to Page V2-T5-41 Refer to Page V2-T5-45 Refer to Page V2-T5-48

5
Orientation C = Contactor H = Horizontal H = Horizontal H = Horizontal
V = Vertical V = Vertical V = Vertical
Logic
5
3 = ATC-300+ X = No Logic E = Electromechanical 1 = ATC-100
9 = ATC-900 3 = ATC-300+
9 = ATC-900
Mechanism C2 = In-phase only
C3 = Time delay neutral (TDN) only
FD = 30–150 A
KD = 150–300 A
FD = 30–150 A
KD = 150–300 A
FD = 30–150 A
KD = 150–300 A
5
C5 = In-phase / TDN transfer LD = 400–600 A
MD = 600–800 A
LD = 400–600 A
MD = 600–800 A
LD = 400–600 A
MD = 600–800 A 5
NB = 800–1000 A NB = 800–1000 A NB = 800–1000 A
Mount Fixed mount Fixed mount Fixed mount Fixed mount 5
C = 100% rated circuit breaker (normal side) A = FM, N (MCS), E (MCS) A = FM, N (MCS), E (MCS) A = FM, N (MCS), E (MCS)
B = FM, N (MCB), E (MCB)
C = FM, N (MCB), E (MCS)
B = FM, N (MCB), E (MCB)
C = FM, N (MCB), E (MCS)
B = FM, N (MCB), E (MCB)
C = FM, N (MCB), E (MCS) 5
D = FM, N (MCS), E (MCB) D = FM, N (MCS), E (MCB) D = FM, N (MCS), E (MCB)
Poles 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole 5
3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole 4 = Four-pole 4 = Four-pole 4 = Four-pole
5
Amperes 0040 = 40 A 0400 = 400 A 0030 = 30 A 0300 = 300 A 0030 = 30 A 0300 = 300 A 0030 = 30 A 0300 = 300 A
0080 = 80 A
0100 = 100 A
0600 = 600 A
0800 = 800 A
0070 = 70 A
0100 = 100 A
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
0070 = 70 A
0100 = 100 A
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
0070 = 70 A
0100 = 100 A
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A 5
0150 = 150 A 1000 = 1000 A 0150 = 150 A 0800 = 800 A 0150 = 150 A 0800 = 800 A 0150 = 150 A 0800 = 800 A
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A
0225 = 225 A 1000 = 1000 A 0225 = 225 A 1000 = 1000 A 0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
1000 = 1000 A 5
0260 = 260 A
Voltage B = 208 V, 60 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz
5
W = 240 V, 60 Hz E = 600 V, 60 Hz E = 600 V, 60 Hz E = 600 V, 60 Hz
X = 480 V, 60 Hz G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
H = 380 V, 50 Hz
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
H = 380 V, 50 Hz
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
H = 380 V, 50 Hz
5
5
K = 600 V, 50 Hz K = 600 V, 50 Hz K = 600 V, 50 Hz
O = 415 V, 50 Hz O = 415 V, 50 Hz O = 415 V, 50 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz W = 240 V, 60 Hz W = 240 V, 60 Hz

Enclosure
X = 480 V, 60 Hz X = 480 V, 60 Hz X = 480 V, 60 Hz
5
S = NEMA 1 K = Open K = Open K = Open
R = NEMA 3R S = NEMA 1
J = NEMA 12
S = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
S = NEMA 1
J = NEMA 12 5
R = NEMA 3R J = NEMA 12 R = NEMA 3R
D = NEMA 4X D = NEMA 4X D = NEMA 4X 5
Listing U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed

Key: DO = Drawout 5
FM = Fixed mounted
MCB = Molded case breaker
MCS = Molded case switch 5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-3

 5.1 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview

Product Selection Guide

5
Transfer Switch Products, continued
5
5
5
5
5
5 Catalog Molded Case–Based,
Maintenance Bypass Power Frame–Based Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based
Numbering

5 System 30–1000 A (up to 480 Vac) 200–5000 A (up to 600 Vac) 200–5000 A (up to 600 Vac)
Type MB = Maintenance bypass AT = Automatic (open transition) BI = Open transition bypass isolation
Refer to Page V2-T5-55 CT = Automatic (closed transition) CB = Closed transition bypass isolation
5 NT = Non-Automatic (open transition) Refer to Page V2-T5-65
Refer to Page V2-T5-55
5 Orientation H = Horizontal V = Vertical V = Vertical
Logic E = Electromechanical 9 = ATC-900 9 = ATC-900
5 E = Electromechanical
Mechanism FD = 100–150 A MG = Magnum DS MG = Magnum DS
5 KD = 150–300 A
LD = 400–600 A
MD = 600–800 A
5 NB = 800–1000 A
Mount Fixed mount Fixed mount Drawout mount Drawout mount
5 A = FM, N (MCS), E (MCS) A = FM, N (PS), E (PS)
B = FM, N (PCB), E (PCB)
E = DO, N (PS), E (PS)
F = DO, N (PCB), E (PCB)
E = DO, N (PS), E (PS)
F = DO, N (PCB), E (PCB)

5
C = FM, N (PCB), E (PS) G = DO, N (PCB), E (PS) G = DO, N (PCB), E (PS)
D = FM, N (PS), E (PCB) H = DO, N (PS), E (PCB) H = DO, N (PS), E (PCB)
Poles 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole 2 = Two-pole
5 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole 4 = Four-pole 4 = Four-pole

5 Amperes 0100 = 100 A

0150 = 150 A
0200 = 200 A
0300 = 300 A
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
0200 = 200 A
0300 = 300 A
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A

5
0225 = 225 A 0400 = 400 A 2500 = 2500 A 0400 = 400 A 2500 = 2500 A
0300 = 300 A 0600 = 600 A 3000 = 3000 A 0600 = 600 A 3200 = 3200 A
0400 = 400 A 0800 = 800 A 3200 = 3200 A 0800 = 800 A 4000 = 4000 A
5 0600 = 600 A
0800 = 800 A
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
4000 = 4000 A 1
5000 = 5000 A 1
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
5000 = 5000 A

1000 = 1000 A
5 Voltage B = 208/120 V B = 208 V, 60 Hz B = 208 V, 60 Hz
W = 240 V E = 600 V, 60 Hz E = 600 V, 60 Hz
5 W = 240/120 V
X = 480 V
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
H = 380 V, 50/60 Hz
G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
H = 380 V, 50/60 Hz
X = 480/277V K = 600 V, 50/60 Hz K = 600 V, 50/60 Hz
5 O = 415 V, 50/60 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz
O = 415 V, 50/60 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz

5
X = 480 V, 60 Hz X = 480 V, 60 Hz
Enclosure K = Open K = Open (up to 3200 A fixed mount only) S = NEMA 1

5
S = NEMA 1 S = NEMA 1 R = NEMA 3R (non-walk-in)
J = NEMA 12 R = NEMA 3R T = NEMA 1 (through the door)
R = NEMA 3R T = NEMA 1 (through the door)
5 Listing
D = NEMA 4X
U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed U = UL 1008 listed

5 Note
1 Supplied as drawout design only.

5
Key: DO = Drawout
5 FM = Fixed mounted
MCB = Molded case breaker
MCS = Molded case switch
5 PS = Power switch
PCB = Power circuit breaker

V2-T5-4 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview
5.1
Product Description Application Description
Eaton’s automatic transfer A transfer switch is a Automatic transfer—This Open in-phase with default
5
switches are reliable, rugged,
versatile and compact
critical component of any
emergency or standby power
type of transfer takes place
automatically per the
to time delay neutral—
break-before-make operation 5
assemblies for transferring system. When the normal programmable settings in using an in-phase monitor for
essential loads and electrical (preferred) source of power the ATS controller. The ATS source synchronization. If the 5
distribution systems from is lost, a transfer switch controller senses source in-phase does not initiate a
one power source to another. quickly and safely shifts the availability and when the transfer within a programmable 5
load circuit from the normal programmed conditions are time delay, then the transfer
Transfer switches can
be supplied in separate
source of power to the
emergency (alternate) source
met, initiates a command to
start the transfer including
will default to a time delay
neutral type of transfer.
5
enclosures for stand-alone of power. This permits critical the generator start command
applications or can be loads to continue running (when transferring from a Delayed transition—This is 5
supplied as an integral with minimal or no outage. utility to a generator source). a “break-before-make” or
component in the following
equipment (see table below).
After the normal source of An automatic transfer switch open transition that also has
a “center off” or neutral
5
power has been restored, can be configured to perform

Product Type
the retransfer process returns
the load circuit to the normal
a utility-to-utility transfer or a
generator-to-generator
position with a programmable
time delay setting for the 5
neutral position. The transfer
Description
Section
Reference
power source. transfer (provided the ATS
controller has this capability). switch is either closed on 5
Transfer switches are Source 1, closed on Source 2,
UL 1558 Switchgear Vol. 3, Tab 4 available with different Bypass isolation transfer or in a center off, neutral 5
UL 891 Switchboards Vol. 2, Tab 4 operational modes including: switch—This type of transfer position (not closed on
Motor Control Centers Vol. 3, Tab 3 ● Manual
switch includes an automatic
transfer switch and also
either source).
5
● Non-automatic includes the bypass switch Delayed transition with
Typical Applications ● Automatic that allows the capability to load voltage decay—This is 5
transfer the load to the a delayed transition with the
Bypass isolation
5
●
All Eaton transfer switches bypass switch without optional feature to delay in
are designed to meet the ● Maintenance bypass the neutral position to point
interrupting the power.
5
requirements set forth by where the load voltage
UL 1008; however, all Switch Types Maintenance bypass decays to a programmable
transfer switches are not Manual transfer—This type transfer switch—A voltage level. When the load
created equal. You can be of transfer is a non-automatic maintenance bypass transfer voltage level reaches the 5
assured of safe and reliable transfer switch manually switch is a non-automatic programmable set point, the
operation from all types
of transfer switches that
initiated and manually (manually initiated and transfer from the neutral 5
operated. There is no motor electrically operated) position initiates.
Eaton offers. operator or solenoid to initiate
the transfer. The operator
initiated transfer switch
used for specific applications Closed transition—This 5
Basic Components needs to open the enclosure for a UPS. is a “make-before-break”
The three basic components door and operate the manual transfer. Both sources are 5
handle. Manual transfer is The power switching connected to the load for
of a transfer switch are:
● Power switching device to
available only on a breaker- operation of transfer switches
may be separated into the
less than 100ms before
the break occurs. The two
5
based design. Service
shift the load circuits to and
from the power source
entrance ratings are not
available on manual transfer
following transition modes: power sources have to be
electrically synchronized in 5
Transition Types voltage, frequency and
Transfer logic controller breaker-based designs.
5
●

to monitor the condition Open transition—This is phase in order for a closed

of the power sources Non-automatic transfer— a “break-before-make” transition to be initiated by
and provide the control This type of transfer is transfer. There is a definite the automatic controller. 5
signals to the power manually initiated, but break in power as the load Programmable setpoints
switching device electrically operated via the
solenoid in a contactor-based
is disconnected from one
source and connected to
allow the user to adjust
frequency and voltage
5
● Control power source to
design and the motor operator tolerances.
supply operational power
to the controller and
in a breaker-based design.
the other source.
5
Open in-phase transition—
switching device This is a “break-before- 5
make” transfer. There is a
definite break in power as the
load is disconnected from
5
one source and connected to
the other source. The ATS 5
controller allows the transfer
only when the phase 5
difference between the two
sources is near zero. 5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-5

 5.1 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview

Switching Mechanisms UL 1008 Endurance Testing

5 The power switching There is no center off or When specifying a UL 1008
mechanism in a transfer neutral position. A three- transfer switch, you can be
5 switch may be designed as position device permits the assured the switch has
either a two-position or a load to be closed on Source met and passed rigorous
5 three-position device. A two- 1, closed on Source 2, or endurance testing.
position device permits the unconnected in the center
5 load to be closed on Source 1
or Source 2.
off or neutral position. UL 1008 Endurance Testing
Number of Cycles of Operations
5 Transition Types
ATS Rating Rate of Operation With Without
(Amperes) Per Minute Current Current Total

5 Contactor-Based
Two Three Molded Power
0–300 1 6000 — 6000
301–400 1 4000 — 4000
5
Transition Types Position Position Case–Based Frame–Based
Open Yes Yes Yes Yes 401–800 1 2000 1000 3000

5 Open in-phase Yes Yes No Yes

801–1600
1601–4000
0.5
0.25
1500
1000
1500
2000
3000
3000
Open in-phase default TDN No Yes No Yes
5 Delayed time delay neutral No Yes Yes Yes
Delayed load voltage decay No Yes Yes Yes
5 Closed Yes Yes No Yes
Life Expectancy
Transfer switch applications
5 Note: Contactor-based (two-position) is designated as C2 in catalog
number. Contactor-based (three-position) is designated as C3 or C5
typically require weekly or
monthly testing. The table
below estimates the life
5 in catalog number.
expectancy of a UL 1008
Listed transfer switch if
5 Fully Rated Fourth Pole (Switched Neutral) exercised once per week
Eaton provides a fully rated ● Reduction in ground based on UL 1008 endurance
5 switched neutral or fourth
pole, meaning that the fourth
current due to isolated
single ground point lowers
testing requirements.

5 pole has withstand, interrupt

and closing ratings identical
arc-flash levels and
reduces generator damage
Life Expectancy
Minimum Life Expectancy Total Life Expectancy
to the power contacts. The
5 Eliminates potential for
●
ATS Rating Operations in Years With in Years (with and
neutral pole is operated on a faults to propagate across (Amperes) Per Year Current Applied without current)
common shaft with the overlapping neutral; fully
5 power contacts, thereby rated fourth pole will
0–300 52 115 115
ensuring simultaneous handle as a normal 301–400 52 76 76
5 opening and closing of the
switched neutral. Eaton’s
operation 401–800 52 38 57
● Does not generate 801–1600 52 28 57
5 fully rated fourth pole
eliminates typical problems
voltages that exceed
normal phase voltage
1601–4000 52 19 57
with a three-pole overlapping
5 neutral: Note: For more detail, reference
Eaton White Paper IA08700002E.
5 Eliminates nuisance
●

ground trips at the main

due to circulating zero
5 sequence harmonic current
between sources
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-6 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Equipment—Product Overview
5.1
Utility—Generator Built-In Protection Standard Application Standard Application
Transfer switches are All Eaton molded case Utility—Generator Generator—Generator 5
traditionally applied between switches are “self
a utility and a generator set protected,” such that under Utility G G G 5
for emergency and standby extreme fault conditions,
power systems. the switch will open before Service
Disconnect
Generator
Breaker
Generator
Breaker
Generator
Breaker
5
destroying itself. This
Generator—Generator
Transfer switches are
feature allows Eaton to
offer “Maintenance-Free ATS
5
ATS
5
sometimes applied between Contacts” on the molded
two generator sets for case transfer switch. The
prime power use, often molded case switches have
in remote installations. In instantaneous magnetic Load
5
such applications, source trip units installed in each Load
power is periodically switch. These trips are not
accessible once installed by
5
alternated between the Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switches
generator sets to equally
share run time.
the factory to eliminate field
tapering. The trips are set to a 5
minimum of 12 to 15 times Transfer Switch Installation Ra
Service Entrance Rated the rated current of the
Typical Transfer Switch Installation For Service Entrance 5
Transfer Switches molded case device, well
5
Utility Service Utility Service
A service entrance rated above any coordination set
transfer switch with integral points. This means they will
overcurrent protection not interfere with the normal
operation of the distribution
5
eliminates the need for Service Service
separate upstream
disconnect devices and
system and will only trip if
something is very wrong.
Disconnect
G
Disconnect
5
their respective power
interconnections. This
G
Generator ATS
Generator
Breaker
ATS 5
means the automatic transfer Breaker
switch (ATS) is installed 5
directly at the point of service
5
Load Load
entrance, saving valuable
space and cost.
Eaton service entrance rated Built-In Protection 5
transfer switches have a
5
Example: 400 Ampere ATS With 500 Ampere T/M Breaker
100% rating. The ATS as well
as the supplied breaker may 400 FLA x 1.25 = 500 Ampere Breaker
be applied at 100% of the
ATS rating, thus eliminating
Compare 400 Ampere ATS and 500 Ampere LD Breaker
400 ATS a Will Only Trip at
5
500 Ampere
5
the need to consider any 7200 Amperes 100% Rated
de-rating factors based upon HLD Breaker Device per UL 1008
the breaker rating. 5

Eaton service entrance rated

Misconception: Breaker
Type Switches Susceptible 5
Time Breaker Trips ATS Trips to Nuisance Tripping.
transfer switches are fully UL
1008 Listed, meaning that the
(Min.) ATS Ok
Reality: Upstream Breaker 5
entire transfer switch Will Trip Before ATS MCS
assembly, including the Trips When Overcurrent
is <7200 A
5
circuit breaker, has passed Breaker Ok
all UL 1008 requirements to 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5
include a dielectric test, Current x 1000
endurance test, overload test,
withstand rating test and
Note 5
1 Magnetic Trip 12 x frame rating.

5
temperature rise test.

5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-7

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Contents
5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open Transition, 40–1600 A
5 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-9
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-10
5 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-11
5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-12

5
Service Entrance Rated—Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open Transition, Service Entrance
Rated, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-14
5 Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch

5 Closed Transition, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-21

Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
5 Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A . . . . . . V2-T5-25

5
5 Open Transition, 40–1600 A
5 Product Description
Eaton automatic transfer Design Highlights Optional Accessories
5 switches (ATS) provide ● Double-throw, solenoid ● Eaton IQ and Power Xpert®
unmatched performance, operated transfer series metering
5 reliability and versatility for
critical standby power
mechanism ● Automatic controller
● Mechanically interlocked to protective cover with
5 applications. Automatic
transfer switches can be
prevent connection of both padlock provision
sources ● Surge protection device
equipped with the ATC-100,
5 ATC-300+ and ATC-900
● Field-selectable multi-tap
transformer panel permits
(UL 1449 3rd edition)
controllers to match any ● Remote annunciator
5 application need. Each
controller offers rock-solid
operation on a wide range
of system voltages
controller—monitor and
control single or multiple
5 Methods of transfer automatic transfer
●
monitoring, status reporting
and transfer control include: open in-phase switches
operation. Superior design transition, time delay
5 Ethernet gateway with
●

and robust construction make in neutral transition, or Web server (Modbus

Eaton’s automatic transfer in-phase with a default TCP/IP, SNMP, BACNet®)
5 switch the industry to time delay in neutral ● Space heater with
benchmark for critical and transfer thermostat
5 distributed power systems. ● Silver composition main
contacts
5 Product Configuration
● 40, 80, 100, 150, 200, 225,
● Switch position indication
contacts
5
260, 400, 600, 800, 1000, ● Source 1 position: 1 Form C
1200 and 1600 A ratings ● Source 2 position: 1 Form C
Two-, three- or four-pole
5
●

● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz

5 NEMA® 1, 12, 3R, 4X, open

●

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-8 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Features and Benefits
5
Standard and Optional Controller Features
Automatic Controllers
5
Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
5
Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, Standard Standard Standard
self diagnostics and system settings
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard Standard Standard
5
Engine test and start contact Standard Standard Standard 5
Dual source control power input Standard Standard Standard
Liquid crystal display (LCD) — Standard Standard 5
Programmable set points and plant exerciser — Standard Standard
Password protection — Standard Standard
5
Time stamped history and event log — Standard Standard
5
Time delay bypass — Standard Standard
Go to source 2 control input — Standard Standard 5
Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs — Standard Standard
Lockout and monitor modes — Standard Standard 1600 ATS with ATC-300+ Controller 5
5
Source status output relay contacts — Standard Standard
Modbus RTU communication — Standard Standard
Manual retransfer control input — Optional Standard
5
Source 2 input / load shed input — Optional Standard
USB port—profile and data management — — Standard 5
Preferred source selection — — Standard
Dual generator capability — — Standard 5
User configurable inputs/outputs
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting
—
—
—
—
Standard
Standard
5
5
with pre-/post-event data capture
Integrated load metering — — Optional
Load management with selective load shed — — Optional
5
DC voltage control power input — — Optional
Three source ATS master/slave control — — Optional 5
Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 — Optional Optional

Note
5
5
1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.

1200 A ATS with ATC-300+ Controller 5

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-9

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

5 Neutral
Connections
5
Normal Power

5 Source Lugs
Automatic
Controller

5
Manual Operating
5 Handle Crossbar

5 Operating Power Poles

Mechanism
5 Emergency Power
Source Lugs
5
Load Lugs
5 Power Panel

5 Voltage
Selection and

5 Transformer
Panel

5
5
Typical Contactor-Based ATS 100–400 A
5
Standards and Certifications
5 ● UL® 1008 Listed ● OSHPD certification
● CSA® C22.2 No. 178
5 Certified
● Seismic Zone 4 qualified
5 (CBC, IBC, UBC)

5
5 Catalog Number Selection

5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch (Open Transition)

5 AT C 3 C2 X 3 0400 X S U
5 Type Certification
AT = Automatic U = UL listed
5 NT = Non-automatic
1
Logic
= ATC-100 Amperes
Voltage
A = 120 V, 60 Hz Enclosure
5 Orientation 3 = ATC-300+ Mounting Number of 0040 = 40 A B = 208 V, 60 Hz K = Open
9 = ATC-900 X = Fix mount Poles 0080 = 80 A E = 600 V, 60 Hz
C = Contactor S = NEMA 1
E = Electromechanical 2 = Two-pole 0100 = 100 A G = 220 V, 50 Hz J = NEMA 12
5 Mechanism
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
0150 = 150 A
0200 = 200 A
H = 380 V, 50 Hz
O = 415 V, 50 Hz
R = NEMA 3R
D = NEMA 4X
0225 = 225 A W = 240 V, 60 Hz
5 C2 = In-phase only
C3 = Time delay neutral
0260 = 260 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz
0400 = 400 A
(TDN) only
5 C5 = In-phase / TDN transfer
0600 = 600 A
0800 = 800 A
1000 = 1000 A
5 1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A

5 Note: The catalog numbering system offers a wide variety of standard configurations to meet your
application needs. Please be advised that some catalog number combinations may not be available.
5 Please contact your local Eaton sales representative with any configuration related questions.

V2-T5-10 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Technical Data and Specifications
5
UL 1008 Transfer Switch (Contactor-Based) Short-Circuit Withstand and Closing Current Ratings
Short-Circuit Withstand Closing Current Rating (kA) 5
When Protected by a When Protected by a
Circuit Breaker Specific Circuit Breaker When Protected by a Specific Fuse 5
Transfer Switching Time Duration (0.05 sec.1 2 Max.) Mfg. and Type Based Mfg. and Type Based
Switch
Rating (A)
Mechanism 480 Vac
(Device Type) Max. (kA)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
480 Vac
Max. (kA)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
480 Vac
Max. (kA)
Fuse
Class
Max. Fuse
Size (A)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
Fuse
Class
Max. Fuse
Size (A)
5
40, 80, 100 C2 10 10 30 22 100 K5, RK5 200 100 K5, RK5 200 5
K1, RK1 400 K1, RK1 400
J, T 450 J, T 450 5
5
150, 200 C2 10 22 30 35 100 K5, RK5 400 200 RK1, RK5, J, 600
C, K1, K5
J, K1, RK1 600 L 800
T 800 T 1200
5
225, 260, 400 C2 30 — 50 — 200 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600
5
L
T
800
1200
L 1600
5
40 3, 80 3,
100 3, 150 3,
C3 3, C5 30 3 22 3 50 3 35 3 200 3 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600 200 3 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600 5
200 3
L 800 L 800
5
T 1200 T 1200
225, 260, 400 C3, C5 30 50 50 65 200 RK1, RK5, J, 600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 5
C, K1, K5

L 800 L 1600
5
T 1200 5
600, 800, 1000, C3, C5 50 50 65 65 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600
1200
L 1600 L 1600
5
1600 C3, C5 50 — 65 — 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 — — — 5
L 2000 — —

Notes
5
5
1 For open transition transfer switches rated 40–200 A (C2 switching mechanism) time duration is 0.025 sec maximum.
2 For closed transition transfer switches rated 40–200 A (C3 switching mechanism) time duration is 0.025 sec maximum.
3 For closed transition transfer switches rated 40–100 A (C3 switching mechanism) or 150–200 A (C3 switching mechanism),

the short-circuit withstand closing current ratings associated with a C2 switching mechanism apply. 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-11

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 40–1200 A—Dimensions and Approximate Shipping Weight

5 Ampere
Rating Enclosure A (Height) B (Width) C (Depth)
Load Side, Normal
and Standby Source
Neutral
Connection
Weight in
Lb (kg)

5 40–100 at 480 V 1 N1, N12, N3R

N4X
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
(1) #14–2/0
(1) #14–2/0
(3) #14–1/0
(3) #14–1/0
156 (71)
156 (71)

5 40–100 at 600 V 1 N1, N12, N3R

N4X
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
(1) #14–2/0
(1) #14–2/0
(3) #14–1/0
(3) #14–1/0
164 (74)
164 (74)

5 150–200 at 480 V 1 N1, N12, N3R

N4X
38.68 (982.5)
37.50 (952.5)
18.31 (465.1)
17.50 (444.5)
13.34 (338.8)
14.34 (364.2)
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(3) 1/0–250 kcmil
(3) 1/0–250 kcmil
164 (74)
164 (74)

5 150–200 at 600 V 1 N1, N12, N3R

N4X
52.00 (1321.0)
52.00 (1321.0)
19.81 (503.2)
21.00 (533.4)
16.75 (425.5)
16.75 (425.5)
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(3) 1/0–250 kcmil
(3) 1/0–250 kcmil
260 (118)
260 (118)

5 225–400 at 480 V 1 N1, N12, N3R 52.00 (1321.0) 19.81 (503.2) 16.75 (425.5) (2) 3/0–250 kcmil
(1) 3/0–600 kcmil
(6) 250–500 kcmil 260 (118)

5
N4X 52.00 (1321.0) 21.00 (533.4) 16.75 (425.5) (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (6) 250–500 kcmil 260 (118)
(1) 3/0–600 kcmil
225–1200 at 600 V 2 N1, N3R 79.41 (2017.0) 29.19 (741.4) 22.46 (570.5) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 600 (272) three-pole
5 650 (295) four-pole
N12, N4X 84.75 (2152.7) 29.00 (737.0) three-pole 24.26 (616.2) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 700 (318)
5 600–1200 at 480 V 2 N1, N3R 79.41 (2017.0)
29.00 (737.0) four-pole
25.25 (641.4) three-pole 22.46 (570.5) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil
750 (340)
600 (272) three-pole

5
29.19 (741.4) four-pole 650 (295) four-pole
N12, N4X 84.75 (2152.7) 29.00 (737.0) three-pole 24.26 (616.2) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 700 (318)
29.00 (737.0) four-pole 750 (340)
5
Automatic, Non-Automatic Up to 400 A— Automatic, Non-Automatic 600–1200 A Outline, N1 or N3R
5 Wallmount, N1 or N3R
B C

5 B
G
C 18.25
(463.6)
15.13
(384.3)
13.29 12.49
5 Top of
Lugs on
(337.6) (317.2)
9.85
Power Panel
5 7.75
(250.2)

(196.8) Neutral
5 13.13
H (333.5)

5 A 6.11
(155.2)
68.59
(1742.2)
A

5
5 55.12
(1400.0)
A

5 Front View Side View

Notes Emergency
5 1 Wallmount.
2 Floorstanding and wall-secured—height dimension includes the bottom bracket. 43.23
(1098.1) 28.09
5 (713.5)
25.69
5 (652.5)
C

5 Normal Load

3.94 9.60
5 10.37
(263.4)
(100.0)
3.94
3.68
(93.5)
(43.9)
13.13

5
(100.0) (333.5)

Front View Side View

5
5

V2-T5-12 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
5
1600 A Transfer Switch
5
Ampere A B C Load Side, Normal and Neutral Weight in
Rating Enclosure (Height) (Width) (Depth) Standby Source Connection Lb (kg) 5
1600 A at N1 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.73 (729.7) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 730 (331) three-pole
480 V 1
N3R 90.72 (2304.3) 40.35 (1024.9) 43.34 (1100.8) (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 780 (354) three-pole 5
830 (377) four-pole
5
Automatic, Non-Automatic Open Transition NEMA 1 Enclosure 1600 A
29.22
5
(742.2)
Removable
Panel Normal
Power Cable
5
5
Connections

5
Contactor
Compartment
Door 62.51
(1587.8)

5
90.00
5
Emergency
(2286.0) Power Cable
Connections

26.49 (672.8)
5
24.13 (612.9)
Load Cable
Connections
5
Removable
Panel 5
40.00
(1016.0)
0.00
7.22 (183.4) 5
10.72
Front View (272.3)
28.73
(729.7)
5
5
Side View

Automatic, Non-Automatic Open Transition NEMA 3R Enclosure 1600 A

5
47.59
40.35
(1024.9) 3.14
(79.8)
(1208.8)
5
Normal
Power Cable
5
Connections
5
62.51
(1587.8)
5
5
90.69
(2303.5) Emergency
Power Cable

5
Connections

26.49 (672.8)
24.13 (612.9)
Inner Removable
Panels and Contactor
5
Load Cable Compartment Door
Connections
Outer Door
5
40.00
(1016.0)
0.00
7.22
(183.4)
5
10.72
Front View
(with outer door open)
(272.3)
43.34
5
(1100.8)
Side View
5
Note
1 Freestanding. 5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-13

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Contents
5 Service Entrance Rated—Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open Transition, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-8
5 Service Entrance Rated—Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open Transition, Service Entrance Rated, 40–1600 A
5 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-15
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-18
5 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-18

5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-19
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-19

5 Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch

Closed Transition, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-21
5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A . . . . . . V2-T5-25
5
5
5 Open Transition, Service Entrance Rated, 40–1600 A
5 Product Description
The service entrance rated Product Configuration
5 automatic open transition ● 40, 80, 100, 150, 200, 225,
contactor-based transfer 260, 400, 600, 800, 1000,
5 switch is equipped with an
integrated circuit breaker
1200 and 1600 A
● Two-, three- or four-pole
5 to be applied and installed
directly at the point of
(fourth pole is fully rated)
service entrance.
● Up to 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz
5 The entire transfer switch
● NEMA 1, 3R

5 assembly has been tested

and listed to UL 1008 for use
Design Highlights
● Service entrance rating
as service equipment with a
5 100% load rating. This
listed to UL 1008 with
100% load rating
differs from other transfer
5 Separate ATS and breaker
●
switch products in the
marketplace that may compartment permits safe
access to the ATS
5 only carry a UL 891 listing
or an 80% load rating. ● Combined circuit breaker/
transfer switch assembly
5 The integrated circuit breaker reduces overall equipment
is equipped with a Digitrip size and installation cost
5 310+ trip unit that can be
configured with an Arcflash
● Pad-lockable circuit breaker
permits safe downstream
5 Reduction Maintenance
System to easily meet
maintenance
National Electrical Code
● Circuit breaker with
5 240.87 for arc energy electronic trip unit provides
adjustable settings and
reduction.
5 curve shaping

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-14 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Features and Benefits
5
Standard Features— Optional Features Standard and Optional Controller Features
with ATC-300+ Controller ● Available surge Automatic Controllers 5
● Auxiliary relay contacts: suppression device for Description ATC-300+ ATC-900
● Source 1 present 2NO power/controller, engine
Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, self Standard Standard
5
and 2NC start circuit, phone and
diagnostics and system settings
● Source 2 present 2NO cable connections
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard Standard
5
and 2NC ● Space heater with
● Switch position indication
●
thermostat
Eaton IQ and Power Xpert
Engine test and start contact Standard Standard
5
contacts: Dual source control power input Standard Standard
● Source 1 position 1NO
●
series metering
Open in-phase transition,
Liquid crystal display (LCD) Standard Standard 5
and 1NC Programmable set points and plant exerciser Standard Standard
● Source 2 position 1NO
and 1NC
time delay neutral or in-
phase with a default to Password protection Standard Standard 5
time delay neutral transfer
5
Time stamped history and event log Standard Standard
● Source 1 and Source 2
sensing:
● ATC-300+ and ATC-900 Time delay bypass Standard Standard
controllers available
● Undervoltage/
underfrequency
● Source 2 inhibit
Go to source 2 control input Standard Standard
5
Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs Standard Standard
Manual retransfer to
5
●
● Overvoltage/ Lockout and monitor modes Standard Standard
overfrequency normal
● Remote annunciator with Source status output relay contacts Standard Standard
● Three-phase rotation
protection control Modbus RTU communication Standard Standard 5
● Ethernet communication
Three-phase voltage Manual retransfer control input Optional Standard
5
●

unbalance (PXG 900 Gateway)

Source 2 input / load shed input Optional Standard
● Breaker with LSIG
Pretransfer signal contacts
5
●

electronic trip units USB port—profile and data management — Standard

1NO/1NC (with three-
position mechanism) ● Breaker with Arcflash Preferred source selection — Standard
● Go to emergency (Source 2) Reduction Maintenance Dual generator capability — Standard 5
System User configurable inputs/outputs — Standard
Seven field-programmable
5
●

time delays Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting — Standard

● LCD-based display for with pre-/post-event data capture
programming, system Integrated load metering — Optional 5
diagnostics and Help
message display
Load management with selective load shed
DC voltage control power input
—
—
Optional
Optional
5
● Mimic diagram with source
available and connected Three source ATS master/slave control — Optional 5
LED indication Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 Optional Optional
● Time-stamped history log
Note 5
● System TEST pushbutton 1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.
● Programmable plant 5
exerciser—OFF, daily,
7-, 14-, 28-day interval
selectable run time 0–600
5
minutes no load/load with
fail-safe 5
5
● Modbus® RTU via RS-485
● Source 1 Eaton Series G
breaker with 310+
electronic trip unit 5
with LSI
● Deadfront compartment 5
for breaker
● Series G breaker with 5
shunt trip
● Separate switch 5
compartment
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-15

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Design Features
5
Transformer
Integrated Service Panel Allows
for Easy Field
Entrance Rating
5 The service entrance rated
Changes
to Voltage
contactor design has been Configurations
5 tested and listed to UL 1008
as suitable for use as service
5 equipment. In addition, per
UL 1008, the switch is rated
5 for 100% load ratings and
eliminates application Multi-Tap Voltage Selector

5 considerations when applying

a 100% rated ATS with 100% ATC-300+ Controller
Allows the transfer switch to
be readily applied on most
load ratings.
5 Eaton’s ATC-300+
system voltages by
connecting to the proper
controller offers a full set of terminals. Available system
5 programmable time delays, voltages include 120, 208,
source 2 inhibit and manual 220, 240, 277 or 480 Vac,
5 Electronic Trip Unit on SE Breaker
retransfer. The controller
comes standard with Modbus
60 Hz. The non quick connect
multi-tap transformer is
5 The service entrance breaker
communications. standard on units up to 400 A
and the quick re-connect
is an Eaton Series G breaker
5 with the 310+ trip unit that
provides adjustable rating and
version is standard on
600–1600 A.

5 breaker curve shaping. The

trip unit comes with either
LSI or LSIG curve shaping
5 capability. The long delay and
short delay functions enable
5 the breaker curves to be
manipulated for upstream
5 and downstream breaker
coordination.
5
Lockable Breaker
5 Separate Compartment
for ATS and Breaker
The upstream service rated
breaker includes a door-
5 The standard design
Arcflash Reduction
ATC-900 Controller mounted keyed switch that
will allow the breaker to be
includes a separate deadfront Maintenance System™ Eaton’s new ATC-900
5 compartment for the incoming
breaker and separate The Eaton 310+ electronic
controller brings ease of use,
adaptability, supervisory and
tripped to the OFF position
and electrically locked out.
The keyed switch has a
5 compartment for the ATS.
This innovative design
trip units address the National
Electrical Code® Section
programming capabilities to
mission-critical applications. Normal position and
provides simplified access to 240.87 for Arc Energy The 4.3-inch color TFT display Disconnect position that
5 cable entrance areas and can Reduction. These molded provides simple arrow keys indicates the breaker has
reduce personal protection case circuit breakers provide for quick screen navigation. been tripped. Once in the
5 equipment (PPE) two approved methods to Event logging and recording Disconnect position, the key
may be removed. In addition
requirements when reduce arc energy: energy- of time-stamped events are
5 performing installation or
routine maintenance.
reducing maintenance
switching with local status
viewed easily. Field
configuration of I/O allows
there is a ship loose handle
hasp that allows the breaker
handle to be mechanically
5 indicator and zone selective
interlocking.
user adaptability to special
requirements. locked out.

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-16 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Deadfront 3 Position 5
Breaker Keyed
Compartment
ATS
5
Breaker
Controller
5
Handle
5
Contactor
5
ATS Compartment 5
Breaker with Lockable Door
Multi-Tap
CPT
Compartment
with Bolted
5
Front Panel
5
Typical Service Entrance ATS Construction for 600–1000 A NEMA 1
5
ATS Compartment
5
40–200 A Service Entrance Contactor NEMA 1

Source 1 Neutral Connection 5

Neutral for Source 2 and
Connection Load Extends into
Breaker Compartment
5
Breaker
Compartment
Ground Bar
5
with Deadfront

5
Contactor
Series G
Breaker 5
Contactor
Multi-Tap CPT
5
Quick Re-connect
5
Multi-Tap
CPT Quick 5
Re-connect
5
Source 2 and 600–1000 A Service Entrance Contactor NEMA 1
Load Lugs (ATS Door Open and Breaker Compartment Panel Removed)
5
5
225–400 A Service Entrance Contactor NEMA 1 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-17

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

5
Breaker Line Lugs
Compartment

5
5
5
Controller
5
5 Source 2
Lugs
5
5 Load
Lugs
5
5
Keyed Switch

5 Multi-Tap
CPT Quick
ATS Re-connect
5 Compartment
1200–1600 A Service Entrance 1200–1600 A Service Entrance 1200–1600 A Service Entrance

5 Rated Contactor Design NEMA 1 ATS Compartment Door Open Breaker Deadfront Not Shown

5 Standards and Certifications

● UL 1008 Listed
5 ● CSA C22.2 No. 178
Certified
5
5
5
Catalog Number Selection
5 Service Entrance Rated Contactor-Based Transfer Switch (Open Transition)
5 AT C 3 C2 C 3 0400 X S U
5
Type Certification
5 AT = Automatic
NT = Non-automatic Logic Voltage
U = UL listed

5 3 = ATC-300+ Amperes B = 208 V, 60 Hz Enclosure

Orientation 9 = ATC-900 Switch Number of 0040 = 40 A W = 240 V, 60 Hz S = NEMA 1
E = Electromechanical C = Breaker on Poles 0080 = 80 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz
C = Contactor R = NEMA 3R
5 Mechanism
normal side,
100% rated
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
0100 = 100 A
0150 = 150 A
load 4 = Four-pole 0200 = 200 A
5 C2 = In-phase only
C3 = Time delay neutral
0225 = 225 A
0260 = 260 A
(TDN) only
5 C5 = In-phase / TDN transfer
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
0800 = 800 A
5 1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
1600 = 1600 A
5
5
5

V2-T5-18 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Technical Data and Specifications
5
UL 1008 Short-Circuit Withstand and Close-On
Current Ratings (kA) 5
Short-Circuit Rating 12
Transfer Switch Rating (A) Mechanism 480 Vac Max. (kA)
5
40, 80, 100 C2 30
150, 200 C2 30 5
225, 260, 400 C2 50
40, 80, 100, 150, 200 C3, C5 50 5
225, 260, 400 C3, C5 50
600, 800, 1000,1200 C3, C5 65 5
1600 C3, C5 65

5
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5
Service Entrance Rated Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 40–1600 A, 100% Load Rating
5
Ampere Weight in
Rating
40–100 at 480 V
Enclosure
N1/N3R
A (Height)
52.00 (1320.8)
B (Width)
19.80 (502.9)
C (Depth)
16.75 (425.5)
Normal
(1) #8–350 kcmil
Emergency
(1) #14–2/0
Load
(1) #14–2/0
Neutral 3
(3) #14–1/0
Lb (kg)
240 (109)
5
150–200 at 480 V
225–400 at 480 V
N1/N3R
N1/N3R
52.00 (1320.8)
79.00 (2006.6)
19.80 (502.9)
25.25 (641.4)
16.75 (425.5)
22.59 (573.8)
(1) #8–350 kcmil
(2) #2–500 kcmil
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(2) 1/0-250 kcmil
(1) #6–250 kcmil
(2) 1/0-250 kcmil
(3) 1/0–250 kcmil
(6) 250k–500 kcmil
300 (136)
500 (227)
5
600–800 at 480 V
1000 at 480 V
N1/N3R
N1
79.00 (2006.6)
79.00 (2006.6)
40.37 (1025.4)
40.37 (1025.4)
22.59 (573.8)
22.59 (573.8)
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(12) 4/0–500 kcmil
(12) 4/0–500 kcmil
900 (409)
900 (409)
5
1000 at 480 V
1200 at 480 V
N3R
N1
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
62.50 (1587.5)
48.22 (1224.8)
(4) 4/0–500 kcmil
(4) 500–1000 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(4) 1/0–750 kcmil
(12) 4/0–500 kcmil
(12) 4/0–500 kcmil
1450 (658)
1400 (635)
5
1600 at 480 V
N3R
N1 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0)
66.80 (1696.7)
48.22 (1224.8) (4) 500–1000 kcmil (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (4) 1/0–750 kcmil (18) 1/0–750 kcmil
1450 (658)
1600 (726)
5
N3R 66.80 (1696.7) 1650 (748)
5
Automatic, 40–200 A, NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R, Wall Mount
Automatic, 225–400 A, NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
Floor Standing Wall Attached
5
13.00 15.73 5
(330.2) (399.5)

5
5
5
51.10
5
(1297.9) A
5
A
5
5
C B 5
Notes 5
1 Rating applicable to normal side since transfer switch assembly includes integral circuit

breaker on normal side. Reference Page V2-T5-11 for short-circuit ratings applicable to
alternate/emergency side.
5
5
2 When transfer switch is protected by a specific fuse, please reference Page V2-T5-11

for short-circuit ratings. C B

3 Neutral lug range is specific to 3-phase, 3-pole configuration without ground fault protection.

Check with the Eaton sales representative for lug range associated with other configurations
such as 4-pole (switched neutral) or ground fault protection.
5
5
4 Two-pole is available up to 800 A.

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-19

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5
Automatic, 600–1000 A NEMA 1, 600–800 A NEMA 3R Automatic, 1200 A and 1600 A, NEMA 1
5
Ground

5
Transformer Connections
Pack
Source 2 and
C
CB A Load Load Neutral
5 Connections Connections
ATS Source 2 Source 1
5 Top View—Roof Removed
Compartment Connections Neutral
Connections
Source 1
Breaker
5 Compartment
Connection Neutral Bond

Source 2 and
5 Source 1
Neutral
Load Neutral
Connections

5 Connection Ground Bus

Connections
Source 1
5 Connections

Breaker
5 Switch
A
5 A
Source 2
C B A
Connections
5 Load
Connections

5 Bolted
Front Panel
ATS Compartment
5
Not Shown
Door Not Shown

5 B
B C
Front View Side View—Contactor Compartment
5 Front View—Doors Removed
(Side Panel Removed)

5 Automatic 1000–1600 A, NEMA 3R

5 B C

5
5
5 A

5
5
5
5 D Door Within a Door Design

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-20 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Contents
Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch
Description Page
5
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 5
Open Transition, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-8
Service Entrance Rated—Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 5
Open Transition, Service Entrance
Rated, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-14 5
Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch
Closed Transition, 40–1200 A 5
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-21
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-22 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-23
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-23 5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
V2-T5-24
5
Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A . . . . . V2-T5-25
5
5
Closed Transition, 40–1200 A 5
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits 5
Eaton’s closed transition A transfer switch designed Standard Features Optional Features
contactor-based automatic for closed transition has ● Auxiliary relay contacts: ● UL 1449 3rd Edition 5
transfer switch is designed to make-before-break contacts, ● Source 1 available 1NO/ compliant surge
avoid intentional interruption
of power when both sources
which requires the normal
and alternate sources to be
1NC suppression devices 5
● Source 2 available 1NO/ ● Space heater with
of power are available by
momentarily paralleling
synchronized. The source
contacts on Eaton’s CTC9 will 1NC thermostat 5
both sources. parallel for 100 ms or less. In
● Power quality metering
5
● Switch position indication
addition, a parallel limit timer contacts:
● Stainless steel cover for
The controller is a (watchdog relay) comes controller
Source 1 position 1NO/
5
●
comprehensive, multi- standard to prevent ● Pre-transfer signal contacts
function, microprocessor- 1NC
paralleling sources for an 1NO/1NC
based controller, offering ● Source 2 position 1NO/
extensive monitoring, status
extended period of time.
The ATC-900 provides all- 1NC
● Three-phase rotation
protection (Source 1,
5
reporting and transfer control phase undervoltage,
operation. underfrequency, overvoltage
● Source 1 and Source 2
sensing: ●
Source 2 or both)
Three-phase voltage
5
The make-before-break and overfrequency protection
Undervoltage/ unbalance protection
5
●

contact sequence coupled as a standard. Consult with

underfrequency (Source 1, Source 2
with Eaton’s ATC-900 the local utility company for
or both)
Overvoltage/
5
●
provides a transfer switch permission and to verify the
protection requirements, as overfrequency
that is useful in critical
standby power applications
available from 40–1200 A.
each utility may have
different rules regarding
● Go to emergency (Source 2) 5
closed transition applications.
● Seven field-programmable
Product Configuration Protective relays may be time delays 5
available as an option upon ● LCD-based display for
40, 80, 100, 150, 200, 225,
5
●
request. programming, system
260, 400, 600, 800,1000 diagnostics and help
and 1200 A ratings
● Two-, three- or four-pole ●
message display
Mimic diagram with source
5
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
5
available and connected
● NEMA 1, 3R, 12 LED indication
Time-stamped history log
5
●

Design Highlights ● System test pushbutton

● Field-selectable multi-tap Programmable plant
5
●
transformer panel permits exerciser
operation on a wide range
OFF, 7-day interval
5
●
of system voltages
selectable run time 0–600
minutes no load/load with
fail-safe 5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-21

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Standard and Optional Controller Features Closed Transition Controls

5 Automatic The CTC9 accomplishes the If the TSCT times out and the
Controller closed transition transfer by transfer switch has not
5 Description ATC-900 monitoring the voltage and reached synchronization,
frequency set point the transfer switch will
5 Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, self diagnostics
and system settings
Standard
conditions of both power remain connected to the
sources. Once the set point current power source and a
5
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard
conditions are met, the failure-to-transfer alarm will
Engine test and start contact Standard ATC-900 controller will start be displayed. The transfer
5 Dual source control power input Standard the closed transition
synchronization timer (TSCT).
switch can also be equipped
with an optional open
Liquid crystal display (LCD) Standard
The TSCT is adjustable from transition transfer method
5 Programmable set points and plant exerciser Standard 1 to 60 minutes in duration. for situations where
Password protection Standard synchronization is not
5 Time stamped history and event log Standard
This duration is the time
during which the ATC-900
possible but a transfer is
required.
controller will monitor the
5 Time delay bypass
Go to source 2 control input
Standard
Standard
phase angles to anticipate One of the following
when they will be within transition features can be
5 Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs Standard 8 electrical degrees. The selected:
Lockout and monitor modes Standard closed transition scheme is
● Closed transition only
5 Source status output relay contacts Standard
anticipatory, allowing the
close contacts signal to be ● Closed transition with
Modbus RTU communication Standard default to load voltage
5 Manual retransfer control input Standard
initiated before the sources
are exactly in phase. decay
● Closed transition with
5 Source 2 input / load shed input
USB port—profile and data management
Standard
Standard
default to time delay
neutral
5 Preferred source selection Standard
Dual generator capability Standard Normal Power Automatic
5 User configurable inputs/outputs Standard
Source Lugs Controller

5
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting Standard
with pre-/post-event data capture
Integrated load metering Optional
5 Load management with selective load shed Optional

5 DC voltage control power input

Three source ATS master/slave control
Optional
Optional
Load Lugs

5 Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 Optional

Note
5 1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.

Multi-Tap
5 Transformer

5
5
5
Emergency Power
5 Source Lugs

Typical Contactor-Based ATS (Closed Transition) with ATC-900 Controller

5
5 Standards and Certifications
● UL 1008 Listed ● OSHPD certification
5 ● CSA C22.2 No. 178
Certified
5 ● Seismic Zone 4 qualified
(CBC, IBC, UBC)
5
5

V2-T5-22 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Catalog Number Selection
5
Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch (Closed Transition)
5
CT C 9 C3 X 3 0400 X S U
5
Type Certification
CT = Closed transition U = UL listed 5
Logic Voltage
Orientation 9 = ATC-900
Mounting Number of
Amperes
0040 = 40 A
A = 120 V, 60 Hz
B = 208 V, 60 Hz
Enclosure 5
C = Contactor K = Open
Poles E = 600 V, 60 Hz
5
Mechanism X = Fix mount 0080 = 80 A S = NEMA 1
3 = Three-pole 0100 = 100 A G = 220 V, 50 Hz J = NEMA 12
C3 = 3-position
4 = Four-pole 0150 = 150 A H = 380 V, 50 Hz R = NEMA 3R
0200 = 200 A
0225 = 225 A
W = 240 V, 60 Hz
X = 480 V, 60 Hz 5
0260 = 260 A
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
5
5
0800 = 800 A
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
5
Technical Data and Specifications
5
UL 1008 Transfer Switch (Contactor-Based) Short-Circuit Withstand and Closing Current Ratings
Short-Circuit Withstand Closing Current Rating (kA) 5
When Protected by a When Protected by a
Circuit Breaker Specific Circuit Breaker When Protected by a Specific Fuse 5
Transfer Switching Time Duration (0.05 sec.1 2 Max.) Mfg. and Type Based Mfg. and Type Based
Switch
Rating (A)
Mechanism 480 Vac
(Device Type) Max. (kA)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
480 Vac
Max. (kA)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
480 Vac
Max. (kA)
Fuse
Class
Max. Fuse
Size (A)
600 Vac
Max. (kA)
Fuse
Class
Max. Fuse
Size (A)
5
40, 80, 100 C2 10 10 30 22 100 K5, RK5 200 100 K5, RK5 200
5
K1, RK1 400 K1, RK1 400
J, T 450 J, T 450 5
150, 200 C2 10 22 30 35 100 K5, RK5 400 200 RK1, RK5, J, 600
C, K1, K5 5
J, K1, RK1 600 L 800
T 800 T 1200 5
5
225, 260, 400 C2 30 — 50 — 200 RK1, RK5, J, 600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600
C, K1, K5

5
L 800 L 1600
T 1200
3,
40 80 3,

100 3, 150 3,
C3 3, C5 30 3 22 3 50 3 35 3 200 3 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600 200 3 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600
5
200 3
L
T
800
1200
L
T
800
1200
5
225, 260, 400 C3, C5 30 50 50 65 200 RK1, RK5, J,
C, K1, K5
600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 5
L 800 L 1600
5
T 1200
5
600, 800, 1000, C3, C5 50 50 65 65 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 200 J, T, L, RK5 600
1200
L 1600 L 1600 5
1600 C3, C5 50 — 65 — 200 J, T, L, RK5 600 — — —
5
L 2000 — —

Notes
5
5
1 For open transition transfer switches rated 40–200 A (C2 switching mechanism) time duration is 0.025 sec maximum.
2 For closed transition transfer switches rated 40–200 A (C3 switching mechanism) time duration is 0.025 sec maximum.
3 For closed transition transfer switches rated 40–100 A (C3 switching mechanism) or 150–200 A (C3 switching mechanism),

the short-circuit withstand closing current ratings associated with a C2 switching mechanism apply. 5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-23

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 40–1200 A Closed Transition

5 Enclosure Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals

Load Side, Normal Neutral Weight in

5
Ampere Rating A (Height) B (Width) C (Depth) G (Horizontal) H (Vertical) and Standby Source Connection Lb (kg)
40–100 at 480 V 52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 17.18 (436.4) 16.00 (406.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #14–2/0 (3) #14–2/0 190 (86)

5 40–100 at 600 V 52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 17.18 (436.4) 16.00 (406.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #6–250 kcmil (3) #14–1/0 210 (95)
150–200 at 480 V 52.74 (1339.6) 25.00 (635.0) 17.18 (436.4) 16.00 (406.4) 37.38 (949.5) (1) #6–250 kcmil (3) 1/0–250 kcmil 210 (95)
5 150–200 at 600 V 1 71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2) 14.72 (373.9) 13.00 (330.2) 69.43 (1763.5) (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (6) 250–500 kcmil 800 (363)
225–400 at 480 V 71.02 (1803.9) 31.11 (790.2) 14.72 (373.9) 13.00 (330.2) 69.43 (1763.5) (2) 3/0–250 kcmil (6) 250–500 kcmil 420 (191)
5 225–1200 at 600 V 1 90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4) 32.00 (812.8) N/A N/A (4) 1/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 800 (363)

5 600–1200 at 480 V 1 90.00 (2286.0) 46.00 (1168.4) 32.00 (812.8) N/A N/A (4) 1/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 1/0–750 kcmil 800 (363)

5 Automatic Up to 400 A Wallmount NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R Automatic 600–1200 A—Wallmount NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R
5 Normal Power Connections Neutral Cable
Connections
G Connections Normal Power
5 Cable Connections
B

5
5 Load Power
Connection

5 A
Emergency
5 Power
Connection
A

5
5
5 B C 15.66
(397.8)
19.19 Transformer
Front View Side View
5 (with right side removed) (487.4)

5 C
Load Power
Cable Connections
5 Side View Front View
(with left side removed)
5
5 Note
1 For NEMA 3R, add 17.00 inches (431.8 mm) to depth.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-24 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
Contents
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 5
Open Transition, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-8
Service Entrance Rated—Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 5
Open Transition, Service Entrance
Rated, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-14 5
Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch
Closed Transition, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-21 5
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A 5
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-26
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-27 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . .
V2-T5-27
V2-T5-28
5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-28
5
5
Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A 5
Product Description 5
Whether your needs are Improved performance and ● Kirk-key interlock allows for
standard commercial, harsh reliability lock-out/tag-out of 5
industrial or mission critical, ● UL 1008 listed short-circuit switching mechanism
Eaton’s innovative contactor-
based ATS design and robust
(100 kA; 0.05 second) and ● Three-pushbutton tethered 5
short-time (85 kA; 0.5 control allows the operator
construction set the standard
for maintaining power to
second) withstand closing
ratings provide increased
to manually initiate a
transfer between power
5
critical loads and optimizing reliability and system sources at a distance
system uptime. uptime for multiple 5
National Electrical Code Simplified installation and
Product Configuration
● 1600, 2000, 2600, 3000 A
(NEC) system types integration 5
● Stored energy technology
● Terminal connections can
●

●
Two-, three- or four-pole
Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
permits manual operation be made from the front or
rear and at top or bottom of
5
under load for added
enclosure to simplify
● NEMA 1, 3R redundancy
installation, with built-in 5
● Dual operator facilitates source swap option for
Design Highlights use of a single contactor
type switching mechanism
Normal and Emergency 5
Adaptability and flexibility connections
5
for closed transition
● Highly configurable and ● Standard 40-inch enclosure
configuration, minimizing
integration friendly design depth (NEMA 1) can be
footprint
with ratings from 2000 A
to 3000 A allows you to Enhanced safety and
extended to 48, 54 or 66
inches for integration into
5
5
easily select the right serviceability electrical distribution
transfer switch for your ● Unique compartmentalized lineup. Up to (12) 1/0–750
application kcmil Cu/Al mechanical
● Available in open and
construction provides
enhanced safety for lugs per phase available for 5
closed transition types, as operators and maintenance normal, emergency and
well as Automatic, Non- personnel load connections 5
Automatic and Manual ● Service personnel can ● All mounting locations for
operation modes electrically isolate control anchoring the enclosure 5
● Scalable configurations compartment while are internal to help
including ATC-300+ and
ATC-900 automatic transfer
transfer switch is energized
to facilitate routine
minimize footprint and
maintain seismic ratings
5
when integrated into a
controllers allow matching
intelligence and
maintenance and maximize
uptime power distribution lineup 5
programming capabilities
to your specifications 5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-25

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Features and Benefits

5
5 ATC-900
Automatic Controller
5 Manual
Charging Handle
5 Maintenance
Isolation Switch

5 Manual
Operation Controls
Kirk-Key
5 Interlock

5
Isolated Control
Compartment
Logic

5 Panel

Multi-Tap
5 Voltage Selector

5
5 Typical Open and Closed Transition, 1600–3000 A Contactor-Based Design Transfer Switch

5 Innovative Compartmentalized
Design
Multiple Operation Modes and
Transition Types Intelligent ATS Control
Contactor Switching
Mechanism
Eaton’s contactor-based ATS Operation is possible in three Eaton’s new ATC-900 Robust double-throw switch
5 solutions are engineered for different modes: Automatic, controller brings ease of use, construction includes dual
enhanced safety and uptime, Non-Automatic and Manual. adaptability, supervisory and operator and two-step stored
5 with the front door of the ATS In Automatic mode, a transfer programming capabilities to energy technology. The
forming an isolated is electrically initiated and mission-critical applications. operators can be charged
5 compartment that houses the
automatic controller, control
operated via the controller. The 4.3-inch color TFT display
provides simple arrow keys
electrically via motor or
manually via handle. Once
In Non-Automatic mode, a
5 power transformer assembly,
wire harnesses, relay logic, transfer is manually initiated
for quick screen navigation
and easy viewing of event
charged, stored energy
allows for a complete transfer
manual pushbutton controls, and electrically operated logs as well as recorded and re-transfer sequence to
5 manual charging handle, using a door-mounted time-stamped events. be performed. Manual
terminal blocks and a variety selector switch or via an Field configuration of controls and indication are
5 of optional features to include optional tethered remote
control, which connects via a
programmable I/O allows integral to the design and
a 2-position maintenance user adaptability to special many switching mechanism
standard Ethernet cable. In
5 isolation switch (MIS).Upon
opening the front door, Manual mode, a transfer is
requirements. components are field
replaceable.
manually initiated and
5 service personnel can turn Multi-Tap Voltage Selector
the MIS and electrically operated using integrally Selective Coordination
Allows the transfer switch to
isolate the control mounted pushbuttons
be easily field configured for Transfer switches can be
5 compartment, while the located within an isolated
compartment directly behind
operation at different system configured with an optional
transfer switch is energized. voltages via a single quick- UL 1008 listed short-time
5 This innovative design the front door.Further, the
ATS can be configured as
connect plug. Available withstand closing rating of
enhances safety in the system voltage group 85 kA (0.5 seconds) that is
open or closed transition
5 working environment when
performing inspection or type. The open transition type
offerings include 208/240/
480 Vac, 220/380/415 Vac
ideal for emergency, legally
required, critical operations
routine maintenance. allows the user to select in-
5 phase or delayed transition
and 600 Vac. data systems, and critical
operations power systems
via programmable set points.
requiring selective
5 The closed transition type can
be configured to default to
coordination per the NEC.

5 open transition if source

synchronization doesn’t occur
before a programmable delay
5 timer expires.

5
5
5 Tethered Remote Control Multi-Tap Control Power Transformer

V2-T5-26 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.2
ATC-300+ and ATC-900 Controllers Features Standards and Certifications
Automatic Controllers ● UL 1008 Listed 5
Description ATC-300+ ATC-900 CSA C22.2 No. 178 Certified
5
●

Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, self Standard Standard ● Seismic Zone 4 qualified
(CBC, IBC, UBC)
5
diagnostics and system settings
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard Standard ● OSHPD certification
Engine test and start contact Standard Standard
5
Dual source control power input Standard Standard
Liquid crystal display (LCD) Standard Standard 5
Programmable set points and plant exerciser Standard Standard
Password protection Standard Standard 5
Time stamped history and event log
Time delay bypass
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
5
Go to source 2 control input Standard Standard 5
Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs Standard Standard
Lockout and monitor modes Standard Standard 5
5
Source status output relay contacts Standard Standard
Modbus RTU communication Standard Standard
Manual retransfer control input Optional Standard
5
Source 2 input / load shed input Optional Standard
USB port—profile and data management — Standard 5
Preferred source selection — Standard
Dual generator capability — Standard 5
5
User configurable inputs/outputs — Standard
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting with pre-/post- — Standard

5
event data capture
Integrated load metering — Optional
Load management with selective load shed — Optional
5
DC voltage control power input — Optional
Three source ATS master/slave control — Optional 5
Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 Optional Optional
5
Catalog Number Selection 5
Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch (Closed Transition) 2 5
AT C 9 F5 X 3 2000 X S U 5
Type Certification 5
AT = Automatic (open transition) U = UL listed
NT = Non-automatic (open transition) 3
CT = Automatic (closed transition)
Logic
3 = ATC-300+ Amperes
Voltage
B = 208 V, 60 Hz
5
Enclosure
9 = ATC-900
Mounting
1600 = 1600 A
2000 = 2000 A
E = 600 V, 60 Hz
G = 220 V, 50 Hz S = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
5
Orientation X = Fix mount 2600 = 2600 A H = 380 V, 50 Hz
C = Contactor 3000 = 3000 A O = 415 V, 50 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz
5
X = 480 V, 60 Hz
Mechanism
F5 = F type, inphase/delayed transition
Number of Poles
3 = Three-pole
5
5
G5 = G type, inphase/delayed transition 4 = Four-pole

Notes
1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.
5
2 Some catalog number combinations may not be available. Please contact your local Eaton sales representative with any product configuration questions.
3 Non-automatic (open transition) type does not support open-inphase transition. 5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-27

 5.2 Transfer Switches
Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Technical Data and Specifications

5
Terminal Information for External Power Conductors UL 1008 Listed Withstand Closing Ratings
5 Ampere Up to 600 V
Rating Normal 12 Emergency 12 Load 12 Neutral 3 Ampere Short-Circuit Short-Time
5 2000 (8) 1/0–750 (8) 1/0–750 (8) 1/0–750 (24) 1/0–750 Rating Mechanism (0.05 sec) (0.5 sec) Specific Fuse
2600 (12) 1/0–750 (12) 1/0–750 (12) 1/0–750 (36) 1/0–750 2000–3000 F5 100 kA — 200 kA
5 3000 (12) 1/0–750 (12) 1/0–750 (12) 1/0–750 (36) 1/0–750 2000–3000 G5 100 kA 85 kA 200 kA

5
Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 Contactor-Based Automatic Transfer Switch (Closed Transition)

5 B C B C

5
Outer
5 door
Inner door

5
A
A
5
5
5
5
NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
5 (Controller and Device Panels Mounted on Inner Door)

5 Shipping Weight
Ampere Rating Enclosure Type A (Height) 5 B (Width) 5 C (Depth) 45 in Lb (kg) 5
5 2000 NEMA 1 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 1356 (615)
2600 NEMA 1 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 1356 (615)
5 3000 NEMA 1 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 1356 (615)

5 2000
2600
NEMA 3R
NEMA 3R
90.69 (2303.5)
90.69 (2303.5)
40.00 (1016.0)
40.00 (1016.0)
58.59 (1488.2)
58.59 (1488.2)
1356 (615)
1356 (615)

5 3000 NEMA 3R 90.69 (2303.5) 40.00 (1016.0) 58.59 (1488.2) 1356 (615)

Notes
5 1 Standard mechanical lugs are UL listed, solderless screw-type Cu/Al. Number of conductors and size range shown is per pole.
2 Two-hole compression lug or bus provisions available upon request. Please contact your local Eaton sales representative for more details.

5 3 Only applies to wye system configuration with solid neutral. For four-pole, switched neutral configurations, the number and size of

conductors supported will mimic Normal, Emergency and Load information shown.

5
4 Standard depth extensions are available for integration into electrical distribution equipment line-up.

Please contact your local Eaton sales representative for more details.
5 Dimension in inches (mm) and weight in lb (kg). Data is approximate and subject to change.

5 Please reference product outline drawing(s) for latest information.

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-28 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Contents
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches 5
Open and Closed Transition,
Dual Drawout, 40–1600 A 5
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . V2-T5-30
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-32 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-32
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-32 5
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-33
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-34 5
Open and Closed Transition, Drawout ATS,
Fixed Bypass, 40–1200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-35 5
5
5
5
Open and Closed Transition, Dual Drawout, 40–1600 A 5
Product Description 5
Eaton’s bypass isolation Design Highlights
transfer switch is used in life ● Front access is a standard 5
safety and other mission- feature on all ratings
critical applications where
redundancy is desired and
● Entry: 5
● Top, bottom or both
maintenance of the automatic
transfer switch can be ● Isolated compartments 5
performed without ● Improved safety:
interrupting power to the ● Isolated compartments 5
load. Transfer switches can with barriers
be equipped with the ATC-
300+ or ATC-900 controller.
● Single motion rack-out 5
with doors closed
Product Configuration ● Ability to test power 5
switching elements
100, 150, 200, 225, 260,
5
●
during drawout process
400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200
and 1600 A ● Dual ATS capability—both
● Two-, three- or four-pole
the ATS switch and bypass 5
switch operate in
(fourth pole is fully rated)
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
automatic mode
5
● Installation flexibility:
● NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4X ● Field entry/exit locations
can be modified in the
5
●
field
Interchangeable drawout
5
●
contactors
Field-selectable multi-tap
5
transformer panel permits
operation on a wide range 5
of system voltages
● Dual drawout—ATS and 5
bypass
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-29

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Features, Benefits and Functions

5
Standard Features Optional Features
5 ● Drawout cassette design ● Field-programmable ● Surge protection
on both ATS and bypass time delays: (UL 1449 3rd Edition)
5 ● No service interruption in ● Time delay engine start: ● Eaton IQ and Power Xpert
bypass to the same source 0–1200 seconds multi-function power
5 ● Source available contacts: ● Time delay normal quality metering
● Source 1 present to emergency: ● Automatic transfer mode
5 2NO and 2NC 0–1800 seconds with selectable non-
● Source 2 present ● Time delay emergency automatic/automatic
5 2NO and 2NC to normal:
0–1800 seconds ●
retransfer mode
Modbus RTU via RS-485
● Switch position contacts:
5 ● Source 1 position
● Time delay engine
cooldown:
● Remote annunciation with
control
1NO and 1NC
5 ● Source 2 position ●
0–1800 seconds
Time delay emergency
● Open in-phase transition,
time delay neutral or in-
1NO and 1NC
5 ● Source 1 and Source 2 ●
failure: 0–6 seconds
LCD-based display for
phase with a default to
time delay neutral transfer
sensing:
programming, system ATC-900 controller
5
●
● Undervoltage/ diagnostics and Help
underfrequency
● Includes Modbus RTU
menu display via RS-485
5 ● Overvoltage/ ● Mimic diagram with source ● Includes four
overfrequency available and connected programmable inputs/
5 ● Three-phase rotation
protection
LED indication outputs
● Time-stamped history log ● Includes two plant
5 ●
(ATC-300+ only)
Three-phase voltage
● System TEST pushbutton exercisers
● Programmable plant ● Includes LCD color
5 unbalance/loss
(ATC-300+ only) exerciser—OFF, daily, display with easy
7-, 14-, 28-day interval navigation tools to
5 Pretransfer signal
●
selectable run time settings and event logs
contacts 1NO and 1NC 0–600 minutes no load/
(open transition only)
● Expandable I/O (up to
5 ● Go to Source 2
load with fail-safe 20 I/O total)
(EMERGENCY)
● Optional integrated load
5 metering
● Optional EtherNet TCP/
5 IP communications

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-30 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Bypass Isolation Switch Design
5
Front Access Improved Safety Ease of Transfer
Front access is a standard
feature. Source 1 (NORMAL)
The unique Eaton design
includes separation
The Eaton design allows the
operator to make a quick and
5
Source and Load connections
are set up as standard top
between control and
power components. The
simple transfer from the ATS
power contactor to the 5
entry and Source 2 ATS and bypass isolation bypass contactor by initiating
(EMERGENCY) Source contactors are mounted in the electrically operated 5
connections as bottom entry. separate compartments with transfer via a two-position
These connections are protective barriers between switch. Door-mounted 5
located in their own separate them. This design prevents indicating lights confirm
compartments. These
connections can be relocated
the possibility of contact
with the rear-mounted
that a successful transfer
has taken place.
5
in the field if necessary. power connections to the
contactors. In addition, the Dual ATS Capability 5
Multi-Tap Transformer top and bottom entry have The controller automatically
The industry-exclusive multi-
tap system voltage selector
separate compartment doors. operates both the ATS and
bypass switching
5
allows the transfer switch to
be applied on most system
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power
mechanisms. When in the
bypass mode of operation, 5
voltages by proper insertion contactor is easily initiated the controller continues to
of the selector plug. and controlled via door- monitor the normal power 5
mounted controls. Once source and will automatically
Dual Drawout
Both the ATS and bypass
the transfer to the bypass initiate a transfer to the 5
contactor is complete, the alternate source should the
contactor assemblies are
identical, interchangeable
ATS contactor is easily racked
out with the compartment
normal source fail. This
feature effectively provides
5
and can be drawn out.
This feature allows the
door closed. The ATS
contactor may then be tested
dual automatic transfer
switches and redundancy 5
user the ability to withdraw, in the racked out position. for critical applications.
maintain or swap contactor
assemblies, providing
5
redundancy of ATS and
bypass functions from 5
one contactor assembly
to the other. 5
5
Source 1
(NORMAL Connections)
Load
Connections
5
Drawout 5
Bypass Contactor
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Separate Doors for ATS 5
and Bypass Compartments Front Access for Top
or Bottom Entry:
Terminals can be
5
Multi-Tap Transformer
5
Source 2 Relocated in the Field
Drawout ATS Contactor with Quick Connect Plugs
Completely Removed (EMERGENCY Connections)

Bypass Isolation Switch Components

5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-31

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Standards and Certifications

5 ● UL 1008 Listed ● OSHPD certification

5 CSA C22.2 No. 178

●

Certified

5 Seismic Zone 4 qualified

●

(CBC, IBC, UBC)

5
5 Catalog Number Selection

5 Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switch (Dual Drawout)

5 BI C 3 C3 E 3 1200 W S U
5 Type Certification
BI = Bypass isolation U = UL 1008 listed
5 open transition Logic Amperes Voltage
CB = Bypass isolation 3 = ATC-300+ Mounting 0100 = 100 A B = 208 V, 60 Hz Enclosure
5 closed transition 9 = ATC-900 E = Drawout (ATS & Bypass) 0150 = 150 A
0225 = 225 A
E
G
= 600 V, 60 Hz
= 220 V, 50 Hz
S = NEMA 1
R = NEMA 3R
Orientation 0260 = 260 A H = 380 V, 50 Hz
5 C = Contactor
Mechanism
C3 = Time delay neutral
Number of Poles
2 = Two-pole
0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
O
W
= 415 V, 50 Hz
= 240 V, 60 Hz

5
(TDN) only 3 = Three-pole 0800 = 800 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz
C5 = In-phase/TDN transfer 4 = Four-pole 1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A
5 1600 = 1600 A 1

5
Technical Data and Specifications
5
UL 1008 Short-Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
5 UL 1008 480 V 480 V 600 V 600 V Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse
Ampere Specific Specific Rating Maximum Transfer Maximum Fuse
5 Rating 0.05 Seconds 2 Breaker 0.05 Seconds 2 Breaker (kA) Switch Voltage Fuse Type Amperes
100 30 50 22 35 200 600 RK1, RK5, J, 600
5 C, K1, K5
150 30 50 22 35 200 600 RK1, RK5, J, 600
5 C, K1, K5
200 30 50 22 35 200 600 RK1, RK5, J, 600
5 C, K1, K5
225 30 50 42 65 200 600 RK5 600
5 260 30 50 42 65 200 600 RK5 600
400 30 50 42 65 200 600 RK5 600
5 600 50 65 42 65 200 600 L 1200

5 800
1000
50
50
65
65
42
42
65
65
200
200
600
600
L
L
1200
1600

5 1200 50 65 42 65 200 600 L 1600

1600 50 65 — — 200 480 L 2000
5 Notes
1 1600 A is dual drawout only and up to 480 V.

5 2 0.025 seconds up through 200 A.

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-32 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Diagrams
5
Bypass Isolation
Shown as Normal Operation 5
Bypass
Source 1
Bypass
Source 2 5
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY)
5
Bypass
5
Source 1 (3) (4) Source 2 ATS
5
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY) Locked In
Available Load Available 5
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed) 5
Door Open 5

(1) (2)
5
ATS

5
ATS ATS 5
Source 1 Source 2
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY)
5
1200 A Dual Drawout (ATS and Bypass) 400 A Dual Drawout (ATS and Bypass)
5
Source 1 Source 1 (NORMAL),
(NORMAL)
Connections
Load
Connections Drawout Bypass
Source 2 (EMERGENCY)
and Load Connection
5
Located in Top
5
Contactor
with Separate Compartment
Compartment Behind Removable

Front Access for

Door—Shown
Racked Out
Electrical Panel
5
Top or Bottom
Entry; Terminals
Can be Relocated
Separate ATS 5
Compartment
in the Field and Door Electrical Panels
can be Removed for 5
Installation for Top
Drawout ATS
or Bottom Entry 5
Source 2 Contactor
(EMERGENCY)
Connections
Completely
Removed
5
Separate Doors for
5
Drawout Bypass
5
ATS and Bypass
Contactor Compartments

5
Drawout
Bypass Contactor 5
Compartment

Drawout ATS
5
Drawout ATS
5
Contactor Contactor
Completely
Removed
Multi-Tap Transformer 5
with Quick Connect Plug
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-33

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 600–1600 A (480 V) or 225–1200 A (600 V) 100–400 A (480 V) or 100–200 A (600 V)

Dual Drawout Bypass—NEMA 1 Dual Drawout Bypass—NEMA 1
5 B Load

5
Connections

Emergency
5 Power Cable
Connections

5 Load Cable
Connections
Source 1 Normal
5 Bypass
Normal
Connections
Power Cable
Connections

5
A Electrical
CG
5 Source 2
A Panel Not
Shown for
ATS Clarity
5
Emergency
Connections

5 Neutral
Connections

5
5 B C B C

5 Front View Side View Front View Side View

5 Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 100–1200 A—NEMA 1 Dimensions and Approximate Shipping Weight
Enclosure Seismic 2 Standard Terminals 4
5 Ampere
Rating 3 Height (A) Width (B) Depth (C)
Normal, Emergency
and Load Neutral
Metric Conversion
(mm2) 4
Weight in
Lb (kg)

5 100–200 A at 480 V 5 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 29.30 (744.2) (1) #6–350 Cu/Al (3) #6–350 Cu/Al 13–177 mm2 Cu/Al 625 (283.8)
100–200 A at 600 V 5 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 29.30 (744.2) (1) #6–350 Cu/Al (3) #6–350 Cu/Al 13–177 mm2 Cu/Al 625 (283.8)
5 225–400 A at 480 V 5 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 29.30 (744.2) (1) 3/0–600 Cu/Al (3) 3/0–600 Cu/Al 85–304 mm2 Cu/Al 625 (283.8)
85–304 mm2 Cu/Al
5
225–400 A at 600 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1750 (794.5)
600 A at 480 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 85–380 mm2 Cu/Al 1750 (794.5)

5 600 A at 600 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 85–380 mm2 Cu/Al 1750 (794.5)
800–1200 A at 480 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 85–380 mm2 Cu/Al 1850 (839.9)
5 800–1200 A at 600 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 85–380 mm2 Cu/Al 1850 (839.9)
1600 A at 480 V 6 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 40.00 (1016.0) (5) 1/0–750 Cu/Al (16) 1/0–750 Cu/Al 85–380 mm2 Cu/Al 2200 (997.9)
5 Notes

5
1 Source 1 Normal and Load connections are top and Source 2 is bottom. These connections can be relocated in the field.
2 For seismic applications, it is necessary to use 5–13 UNC Grade or better hex head bolts and washers torqued to 50 ft-lbs.
3 NEMA 12 and 4X dimensions are 90.00 inches H x 46.00 inches W x 38.00 inches D (2286.0 mm H x 1168.4 mm W x 965.2 mm D).

5 NEMA 4X enclosures are 304SS standard with an optional upgrade to 316SS.

4 Same number of terminals per phase will be supplied.

5
5 For NEMA 3R dimensions, add 18.29 inches (464.6 mm).
6 For NEMA 3R dimensions, add 18.59 inches (472.2 mm).

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-34 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Contents
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switch—Fixed Bypass
Description Page
5
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches 5
Open and Closed Transition,
Dual Drawout, 40–1600 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-29 5
Open and Closed Transition, Drawout ATS,
Fixed Bypass, 40–1200 A 5
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . V2-T5-36
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-38 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-38
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-38 5
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-39
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-40 5
5
5
5
Open and Closed Transition, Drawout ATS, Fixed Bypass, 40–1200 A 5
Product Description 5
Eaton’s bypass isolation Design Highlights
transfer switch is used in ● Front access is a standard 5
life safety and other mission- feature on all ratings
critical applications where
redundancy is desired and
● Entry: 5
● Top, bottom or both
maintenance of the automatic
transfer switch can be ● Isolated compartments 5
performed without ● Improved safety:
interrupting power to the ● Isolated compartments 5
load. Transfer switches can with barriers
be equipped with the ATC-
300+ or ATC-900 controller.
● Single motion rack-out 5
with doors closed
Product Configuration ● Ability to test power 5
switching elements
100, 150, 200, 225, 260,
5
●
during drawout process
400, 600, 800, 1000 and
1200 A ● Dual ATS capability—
● Two-, three- or four-pole
both the ATS switch 5
and the bypass switch
(fourth pole is fully rated)
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
operate in automatic
mode
5
● NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4X ● Installation flexibility:
● Field entry/exit locations
5
can be modified in the
field 5
Interchangeable drawout
5
●

contactors
Field-selectable multi-tap
5
●

transformer panel permits

operation on a wide range
of system voltages 5
● Fixed-mounted bypass,
drawout ATS 5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-35

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Features, Benefits and Functions

5
Standard Features Optional Features
5 ● Drawout cassette design ● Field-programmable ● Surge protection
on ATS with fixed-mounted time delays: (UL 1449 3rd Edition)
5 bypass ● Time delay engine start: ● Eaton IQ and Power Xpert
● No service interruption in 0–1200 seconds multi-function power
5 bypass to the same source ● Time delay normal quality metering
● Source available contacts: to emergency: ● Automatic transfer mode
5 ● Source 1 present 0–1800 seconds with selectable non-
2NO and 2NC ● Time delay emergency automatic/automatic
5 ● Source 2 present to normal:
0–1800 seconds ●
retransfer mode
Modbus RTU via RS-485
2NO and 2NC
5 ● Switch position contacts: ● Time delay engine
cooldown:
● Remote annunciation with
control
● Source 1 position
5 1NO and 1NC
●
0–1800 seconds
Time delay emergency
● Open in-phase transition,
time delay neutral or in-
● Source 2 position
5 1NO and 1NC
●
failure: 0–6 seconds
LCD-based display for
phase with a default to
time delay neutral transfer
● Source 1 and Source 2
programming, system ATC-900 controller
5
●
sensing:
diagnostics and Help ● Includes Modbus RTU
● Undervoltage/ menu display via RS-485
5 underfrequency ● Mimic diagram with source ● Includes four
● Overvoltage/ available and connected programmable inputs/
5 ●
overfrequency
Three-phase rotation
LED indication outputs
● Time-stamped history log ● Includes two plant
5 protection
(ATC-300+ only)
● System TEST pushbutton exercisers
● Programmable plant ● Includes LCD color
5 Three-phase voltage
●

unbalance/loss exerciser—OFF, daily, display with easy

(ATC-300+ only) 7-, 14-, 28-day interval navigation tools to
5 ● Pretransfer signal
selectable run time
0–600 minutes no load/
settings and event logs
contacts 1NO and 1NC
● Expandable I/O (up to
5 (open transition only)
load with fail-safe
(ATC-300+ only)
20 I/O total)
● Go to Source 2
● Optional integrated load
5 (EMERGENCY) metering
● Optional EtherNet TCP/
5 IP communications

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-36 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Bypass Isolation Switch Design
5
Front Access Improved Safety Ease of Transfer
Front access is a standard
feature. Source 1 (NORMAL)
The unique Eaton design
includes separation
The Eaton design allows the
operator to make a quick and
5
Source and Load connections
are set up as standard top
between control and
power components. The
simple transfer from the ATS
power contactor to the 5
entry and Source 2 ATS and bypass isolation bypass contactor by initiating
(EMERGENCY) Source contactors are mounted in the electrically operated 5
connections as bottom entry. separate compartments with transfer via a two-position
These connections are protective barriers between switch. Door-mounted 5
located in their own separate them. This design prevents indicating lights confirm
compartments. These
connections can be relocated
the possibility of contact
with the rear-mounted
that a successful transfer
has taken place.
5
in the field if necessary. power connections to the
contactors. In addition, the Dual ATS Capability 5
Multi-Tap Transformer top and bottom entry have The controller automatically
The industry-exclusive multi-
tap system voltage selector
separate compartment doors. operates the ATS and bypass
switching mechanisms. When
5
allows the transfer switch to
be applied on most system
Ease of Maintenance
Transfer to the bypass power
in the automatic bypass mode
of operation, the controller 5
voltages by proper insertion contactor is easily initiated continues to monitor the
of the selector plug. and controlled via door- normal power source and will 5
mounted controls. Once automatically initiate a transfer
Dual Drawout
Both the ATS and bypass
the transfer to the bypass to the alternate source should 5
contactor is complete, the the normal source fail. This
contactor assemblies are
identical, interchangeable
ATS contactor is easily racked
out with the compartment
feature effectively provides
dual automatic transfer
5
and can be drawn out.
This feature allows the
door closed. The ATS
contactor may then be tested
switches and redundancy
for critical applications. 5
user the ability to withdraw, in the racked out position.
maintain or swap contactor
assemblies, providing
5
redundancy of ATS and
bypass functions from 5
one contactor assembly
to the other. 5
5
Front Access for
5
5
Top or Bottom Entry

5
Fixed-Mounted 5
Bypass Contactor
5
5
5
Drawout ATS
Contactor
5
Completely
Removed 5
Separate Doors for
5
ATS and Bypass
Compartments 5
5
Bypass Isolation Fixed Bypass Components
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-37

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Standards and Certifications

5 ● UL 1008 Listed ● OSHPD certification

5 CSA C22.2 No. 178

●

Certified

5 Seismic Zone 4 qualified

●

(CBC, IBC, UBC)

5
5 Catalog Number Selection

5 Automatic Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switch (Drawout ATS, Fixed Bypass)

5 BI C 3 C3 X 3 1200 W S U
5 Type Certification
BI = Bypass isolation U = UL 1008 listed
5 open transition
CB = Bypass isolation
Logic
3 = ATC-300+ Mounting
Amperes
0100 = 100 A B
Voltage
= 208 V, 60 Hz Enclosure
closed transition
5 9 = ATC-900 X = Drawout ATS, 0150 = 150 A E = 600 V, 60 Hz S = NEMA 1
Fixed Bypass 0225 = 225 A G = 220 V, 50 Hz R = NEMA 3R
Orientation Frame 0260 = 260 A H = 380 V, 50 Hz
5 C = Contactor C3 = Time delay neutral Number of Poles 0400 = 400 A
0600 = 600 A
O
W
= 415 V, 50 Hz
= 240 V, 60 Hz
(TDN) only 2 = Two-pole
0800 = 800 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz
5 C5 = In-phase/TDN transfer 3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
1000 = 1000 A
1200 = 1200 A

5
5 Technical Data and Specifications
UL 1008 Short-Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
5 480 V 480 V 600 V 600 V Rating When Used with Upstream Fuse
UL 1008

5 Ampere
Rating 1 0.05 Seconds 2
Specific
Breaker 0.05 Seconds 2
Specific
Breaker
Rating
(kA)
Maximum Transfer
Switch Voltage Fuse Type
Maximum Fuse
Amperes

5 100 30 50 22 35 200 480 RK1, RK5, J,

C, K1, K5
600

5
150 30 50 22 35 200 600 RK1, RK5, J, 600
C, K1, K5
200 30 50 22 35 200 600 RK1, RK5, J, 600
5 C, K1, K5
225 30 50 42 65 200 600 RK5 600
5 260 30 50 42 65 200 600 RK5 600

5 400
600
30
50
50
65
42
42
65
65
200
200
600
600
RK5
L
600
1600

5 800 50 65 42 65 200 600 L 1600

1000 50 65 42 65 200 600 L 1600
5 1200 50 65 42 65 200 600 L 1600

5 Notes
1 1600 A is available on dual drawout only.
2 0.025 seconds up through 200 A.

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-38 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches
5.3
Diagrams
5
Bypass Isolation
Shown as Normal Operation 5
Bypass
Source 1
Bypass
Source 2 5
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY)
5
Bypass
5
Source 1 (3) (4) Source 2 ATS
5
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY) Locked In
Available Load Available 5
ATS Isolated
(Flashing: ATS Removed) 5
Door Open 5

(1) (2)
5
ATS
5
ATS ATS 5
Source 1 Source 2
(NORMAL) (EMERGENCY)
5
1200 A Fixed Bypass 400 A Fixed Bypass 5
5
5
Fixed-Mounted
Bypass Contactor 5
Front Access for
Top or Bottom Entry
5
Drawout ATS
Contactor Rack Out 5
5
5
5
5
5
Fixed-Mounted
Bypass Contactor Drawout 5
Bypass Contactor
Compartment 5
Drawout ATS
Contactor
5
Drawout ATS
Contactor 5
Cassette
with Wheels
Completely
Separate Doors
for ATS and Bypass 5
Removed Compartments
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-39

 5.3 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Contactor-Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 600–1200 A (480 V) or 225–1200 A (600 V) 100–400 A (480 V) or 100–225 A (600 V)

Fixed Bypass—NEMA 1 Fixed Bypass—NEMA 1
5 Top and Bottom

5 Compartment Electrical
Panel Not Shown for Clarity

5 Source 1
Normal
Connection
5
5
5
5 A A
Source 2

5 Emergency
Connections

5 Load
Cable
Connections
5 Source 1
Normal Source 2
Emergency
5 Connection
Load Connections
B Connections C B C
5 Front View Side View Front View Side View

5
Contactor-Based Transfer Switch 100–1200 A—NEMA 1 Dimensions and Approximate Shipping Weight
5 Ampere Enclosure Seismic 1 Standard Terminals Weight in

5 Rating 1
100–200 A at 480 V 2
Height (A)
78.07 (1983.0)
Width (B)
30.00 (762.0)
Depth (C)
29.30 (744.2)
Normal and Emergency Load
(1) #6–350 Cu/Al (1) #6–350 Cu/Al
Neutral
(3) #6–350 Cu/Al
Lb (kg)
625 (283.8)

5 100–200 A at 600 V 2 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 29.30 (744.2) (1) #6–350 Cu/Al (1) #6–350 Cu/Al (3) #6–350 Cu/Al 625 (283.8)
225–400 A at 480 V 2 78.07 (1983.0) 30.00 (762.0) 29.30 (744.2) (1) 3/0–600 Cu/Al (1) 3/0–600 Cu/Al (3) 3/0–600 Cu/Al 625 (283.8)
5 225–400 A at 600 V 3 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1550 (703.7)
3

5
600 A at 480 V 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1550 (703.7)
600 A at 600 V 3 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (2) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (6) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1550 (703.7)

5 800–1200 A at 480 V 3 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1750 (794.5)
800–1200 A at 600 V 33 90.00 (2286.0) 40.00 (1016.0) 28.97 (735.8) (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (4) 3/0–750 Cu/Al (12) 3/0–750 Cu/Al 1750 (794.5)
5 Notes
1 For seismic applications, it is necessary to use 5–13 UNC Grade or better hex head bolts and washers torqued to 50 ft-lbs.

5 2 For NEMA 3R dimensions, add 18.29 inches (464.6 mm).

3 For NEMA 3R dimensions, add 18.59 inches (472.2 mm).

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-40 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Contents
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open Transition, Manual Operation, 30–1000 A
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-42 5
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-42
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-42 5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-43
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-44 5
5
Open Transition, Non-Automatic
Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-45
Open Transition, Automatic
Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-48 5
5
5
5
Open Transition, Manual Operation, 30–1000 A 5
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits 5
Eaton’s wallmount manually Manual transfer switches Features
operated transfer switches cover applications ranging ● Molded case switch power 5
are designed for a variety of from 30 to 1000 A through contact assemblies
standby power applications
for critical loads. In the event
600 Vac for standard manual
configurations and open
● Positive mechanical 5
interlocking
of a primary power source
interruption, the user can
transition.
● Permanently affixed 5
manually transfer the load Manual transfer switches manual operating handle
circuits to the standby power may be applied for those
application where a manually Benefits
5
source. Once primary power
has been restored, the user
can manually transfer the load
initiated and manually
operated transfer is suitable.
● High withstand, totally
enclosed for maximum arc
5
The front door of the switch suppression and isolation
circuits back to the primary
power source. must be opened to operate during power transfer 5
the manual handle. The Optional trip units offer
5
●

Product Configuration design comes standard with a system overcurrent

deadfront design, allowing protection
● 30, 70, 100, 150, 200, 225,
300, 400, 600, 800, 1000 A
safe manual transfer under
load. Should an application
● Prevents the paralleling of Deadfront 5
● Two-, three- or four-pole two sources of power Manual Handle
(fourth pole is fully rated)
require a service entrance
rating, then a non-automatic ● Permits safe and 5
convenient manual transfer Manual Switch with Door Open—
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz or automatic design needs to
● NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4X, open be selected. of power
Manually Initiated and
Manually Operated 5
● Requires no control power
Note: If a service entrance rating
is required, then a non-automatic 5
type switch must be selected.
Service entrance ratings are 5
not available on a manual
transfer switch.
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-41

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Standards and Certifications

5 ● UL 1008 Listed

5 CSA C22.2 No. 178

●

Certified

5 Seismic Zone 4 qualified

●

(CBC, IBC, UBC)

5 OSHPD certification
●

5
5
5
5
5 Manual Switch with Door Closed—
Must Open Door to Engage the
Manual Transfer Switch Shown
Without Deadfront
Manual Handle
5
5 Catalog Number Selection

5 Manual Molded Case–Based Transfer Switch

5 MT H X MD C 2 0100 E S U
5 Type Certification
MT = Manual U = UL 1008 listed
5 Logic
X = No logic
Frame
Number of Poles
Voltage
B = 208 V, 60 Hz
Orientation Molded case device Enclosure
5 FD = 30–150 A 2 = Two-pole E = 600 V, 60 Hz K = Open
H = Horizontal 1
KD = 150–300 A 3 = Three-pole G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz
V = Vertical S = NEMA 1
LD = 400–600 A 4 = Four-pole H = 380 V, 50 Hz J = NEMA 12
5 MD = 600–800 A
NB = 800–1000 A
O = 415 V, 50 Hz
W = 240 V, 60 Hz
R
D
= NEMA 3R
= NEMA 4X
Mounting (Fixed)
X = 480 V, 60 Hz
5 A
B
= FM, N (MCS), E (MCS)
= FM, N (MCB), E (MCB)
C = FM, N (MCB), E (MCS) Amperes
5 D = FM, N (MCS), E (MCB) 0030 = 30 A 0300 = 300 A
0070 = 70 A 0400 = 400 A

5 0100
0150
=
=
100 A
150 A
0600
0800
=
=
600 A
800 A
0225 = 225 A 1000 = 1000 A
5
5 Notes
1 Horizontal is available only on ratings 150 A or less.

5 Service entrance is not available on a manual design.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-42 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Technical Data and Specifications
5
Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for UL 1008 Short Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
Power Cable Connections 1 Ratings When Used With
5
Short Circuit Upstream Fuse (kA)
5
Switch Breaker Line Side (Normal Load Neutral Transfer
Ampere Rating Frame and Standby Source) Connection Connection Switch Maximum Fuse
Rating (A) 240 V 480 V 600 V Fuse Rating Type 2 600 V
5
30–100 HFD (1) #14–1/0 (1) #14–1/0 (3) #14–1/0
150–225 HFD (1) #6–300 (1) #6–300 (3) #4–300 30 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

5
225–300 HKD (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 70 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

400 HLD (1) 4/0–600 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 100 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

600 HLD (1) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 150 100 65 25 400 J,T 200
5
600 HMDL (2) #1–500 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 200 100 65 25 400 J,T 200

600 NB (3) 3/0–400 (3) 3/0–400 (3) 3/0–400 225 100 65 35 400 J,T 200 5
300 100 65 35 400 J,T 200
800
800
HMDL
HNB
(3) 3/0–400
(4) 4/0–500
(3) 3/0–400
(4) 4/0–500
(12) 4/0–500
(12) 4/0–500 400 100 65 35 600 J,T 200 5
5
600 100/65 3 65/50 4 35/25 5 800/1200 J,T 100/200
1000 HNB (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500
800 65 50 25 1200/1600 L 100/200
1000 65 50 25 1600 L 200 5
Notes
1 All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. 5
For alternate terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
2 Class R fuse with 100 kA rating.
3 HMDL frame rated 100 kA. HNB frame rated 65 kA.
5
5
4 HMDL frame rated 65 kA. HNB frame rated 50 kA.
5 HMDL frame rated 35 kA. HNB frame rated 25 kA.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-43

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 30–1000 A Type MTVX, MTHX—NEMA 1, 3R, 12 1

5 Enclosure
A B C
Gutter Space
D E F
Bolt Pattern
G H Standard Terminals 2
Switch Weight
5 Type Height Width Depth Width Depth Bending Horizontal Vertical Line Load Neutral Lb (kg)
HKD (150–225 A) 48.00 (1219.2) 20.81 (528.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.59 (269.0) 11.00 (279.4) 45.50 (1155.7) (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 305 (138)
5 HKD (300 A) 56.00 (1422.4) 20.81 (528.6) 16.65 (422.0) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 13.59 (345.2) 11.00 (279.4) 53.50 (1358.9) (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 305 (138)
HLD (400 A) 64.00 (1625.6) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.54 (267.7) 16.00 (406.4) 61.48 (1561.6) (1) 4/0–600 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 425 (193)
5 HLD (400 A) 3 53.00 (1346.2) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 11.85 (301.0) 16.00 (406.4) 50.48 (1282.2) (2) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 425 (193)

5 HLD (600 A)
HLD (600 A) 3
64.00 (1625.6)
64.00 (1625.6)
25.81 (655.6)
25.81 (655.6)
16.65 (422.9)
16.65 (422.9)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
10.54 (267.7)
10.54 (267.7)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
61.48 (1561.6)
61.48 (1561.6)
(2) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500
(2) 400–500 (2) #1–500
(12) 4/0–500 425 (193)
(12) 4/0–500 425 (193)

5 HMDL (600 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.73 (450.3) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (2) #1–500 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 510 (232)
HMDL (800 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.73 (450.3) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (3) 3/0–400 (3) 3/0–400 (12) 4/0–500 510 (232)
5 NB (800–1000 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.58 (446.5) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500 570 (259)

5
30–150 A Type MTHXFD Manual Power Panel and Transformer Panel
5 Dimensions Weight Power Panel Type Height Width Depth
A B C D E F G H Lb (kg)
5 22.88 13.13 22.74 22.62 24.50 9.78 10.28 32.31 143
Power Panel
HFD 11.00 (279.4) 17.00 (431.8) 6.81 (173.0)
(581.2) (333.5) (577.6) (574.5) (622.3) (248.4) (261.1) (820.7) (65)
5 HKD 24.50 (622.3) 11.88 (301.8) 17.50 (444.5)
HLD 26.00 (660.4) 16.88 (428.8) 17.50 (444.5)
5 5.00
A
2.00 Latch
(50.8) Open HMDL 36.25 (920.8) 16.88 (428.8) 17.50 (444.5)
B 0.75 Latch
(127.0) NB 36.25 (920.8) 16.88 (428.8) 19.00 (482.6)
5 (19.1) Closed
Transformer Panel

5 HFD 22.00 (558.8) 16.50 (419.1) 6.50 (165.1)

HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB 28.63 (727.2) 8.25 (209.6) 5.50 (139.7)

5
B C
5 E C D G

5 Top of Lugs
on Power Panel F

5
1.75
5 (44.45)
H
D
A
5 Gutter
Space E
H Power
5 Panel Transformer
Panel
1.25 F G
(31.75) Logic

5 Panel

5 Top View Front View Side View

Notes
5 1 Consult factory for NEMA 4X.
2 Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.

5 3 Alternate line terminals.

Dimensions are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes.

5
5
5

V2-T5-44 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Contents
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open Transition, Manual
Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-41 5
Open Transition, Non-Automatic
Operation, 30–1000 A 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-46
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-46 5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-47
Open Transition, Automatic 5
Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-48
5
5
5
5
Open Transition, Non-Automatic Operation, 30–1000 A 5
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Standards and Certifications 5
Eaton’s wallmount non- Non-automatic transfer Features ● UL 1008 Listed
automatic transfer switches switches cover applications ● Molded case switch power ● CSA C22.2 No. 178 5
are designed for a variety of ranging from 30–1000 A contact assemblies Certified
standby power applications
for critical loads.
through 600 Vac for manual
configurations, open
● Positive mechanical and ● Seismic Zone 4 qualified 5
electrical interlocking (CBC, IBC, UBC)
In the event of a primary
transition, standard or
service entrance.
● Permanently affixed ● OSHPD certification 5
power source interruption, manual operating handle
the user can manually
transfer the load circuits to
Non-automatic transfer
switches are manually
● Pushbutton operation 5
the standby power source
through the use of an
initiated, but electrically
operated designs. Front
Benefits
● High withstand, totally
5
external pushbutton. Once door-mounted controls allow
primary power has been the operator to initiate the
enclosed for maximum arc
suppression and isolation
5
restored, the user can transfer. Overcurrent trips during power transfer
manually transfer the load may be added to the design ● Optional trip units offer 5
circuits back to the primary for either or both the normal
system overcurrent
power source through the
use of an external
and emergency source.
Service entrance ratings protection 5
● Prevents the paralleling of
pushbutton. are available. Note that the
Eaton service entrance rated two sources of power 5
Product Configuration non-automatic transfer switch ● Permits safe and
● 30, 70, 100, 150, 200, 225, is a 100% rated and listed to convenient manual transfer 5
300, 400, 600, 800, 1000 A UL 1008 as suitable for use of power under load via
● Two-, three- or four-pole for service entrance. external pushbutton
initiated operation
5
(fourth pole is fully rated)
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz Non-Automatic Transfer Switch 5
● NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4X, open
● Service entrance rated
Device panel shows controls
to initiate the manual transfer 5
and control indicating lights.
In addition, an optional 5
service entrance rating may
be specified. Keyed switch is 5
mounted on the device panel.
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-45

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Catalog Number Selection

5
5
Non-Automatic Molded Case–Based Transfer Switch

NT H E KD C 2 0100 W S U
5
5 Type
NT = Non-automatic
Certification
U = UL 1008 listed

5
Logic Amperes Voltage R = UL recognized
Orientation E = Electromechanical 0030 = 30 A B = 208 V, 60 Hz X = No listing
Mounting 0070 = 70 A E = 600 V, 60 Hz
5
H = Horizontal
Frame 0100 = 100 A G = 220 V, 50/60 Hz Enclosure
V = Vertical Fixed
0150 = 150 A H = 380 V, 50 Hz
Molded case device A = FM, N (MCS), E (MCS) K = Open
0225 = 225 A O = 415 V, 50 Hz
5 FD = 30–150 A
KD = 150–300 A
B = FM, N (MCB), E (MCB)
C = FM, N (MCB), E (MCS)
0300 = 300 A W = 240 V, 60 Hz
S
R
=
=
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R
0400 = 400 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz
LD = 400–600 A D = FM, N (MCS), E (MCB) J = NEMA 12
5 MD = 600–800 A
NB = 800–1000 A
0600 = 600 A
0800 = 800 A
D = NEMA 4X
1000 = 1000 A
5
Number of Poles

5 2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
5
Technical Data and Specifications
5 Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data for UL 1008 Short Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA)
Power Cable Connections 1
5 Switch Breaker Line Side (Normal Load Neutral Transfer Short Circuit
Ratings When Used With
Upstream Fuse (kA)
Ampere Rating Frame and Standby Source) Connection Connection
5
Switch Maximum Fuse
Rating (A) 240 V 480 V 600 V Fuse Rating Type 2 600 V
30–100 HFD (1) #14–1/0 (1) #14–1/0 (3) #14–1/0

5 150–225 HFD (1) #6–300 (1) #6–300 (3) #4–300 30 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

225–300 HKD (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 70 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

5 400 HLD (1) 4/0–600 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 100 100 65 25 200 J,T 200

600 HLD (1) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 150 100 65 25 400 J,T 200
5 600 HMDL (2) #1–500 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 200 100 65 25 400 J,T 200
225 100 65 35 400 J,T 200
5 600 (four-pole)
800
NB
HMDL
(3) 3/0–400
(3) 3/0–400
(3) 3/0–400
(3) 3/0–400
(3) 3/0–400
(12) 4/0–500 300 100 65 35 400 J,T 200

5 800 HNB (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500 400

600
100
100/65 3
65
65/50 4
35
35/25 5
600
800/1200
J,T
J,T
200
100/200
1000 HNB (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500
5 800 65 50 25 1200/1600 L 100/200
1000 65 50 25 1600 L 200
5 Notes
1 All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.

5 For alternate terminal sizes, contact Eaton.

2 Class R fuse with 100 kA rating.

5 3 HMDL frame rated 100 kA. HNB frame rated 65 kA.

4 HMDL frame rated 65 kA. HNB frame rated 50 kA.

5
5 HMDL frame rated 35 kA. HNB frame rated 25 kA.

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-46 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5
30–1000 A Types NTHE, NTVE—NEMA 1, 3R 12 1 5
Enclosure
A B C
Gutter Space
D E F
Bolt Pattern
G H Standard Terminals 2
5
Switch Weight
Type Height Width Depth Width Depth Bending Horizontal Vertical Line Load Neutral Lb (kg)
5
HFD (30–100 A) 3 47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 6.22 (157.9) 10.75 (273.0) 45.24 (1049.1) (1) #14–1/0 (1) #14–1/0 (3) #14–1/0 232 (105)
HFD (150 A) 3 47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 6.22 (157.9) 10.75 (273.0) 45.24 (1049.1) (1) #6–300 (1) #6–300 (3) #4–300 232 (105) 5
HKD (150–225 A) 48.00 (1219.2) 20.81 (528.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.59 (269.0) 11.00 (279.4) 45.50 (1155.7) (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 305 (138)
HKD (300 A) 56.00 (1422.4) 20.81 (528.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 13.59 (345.2) 11.00 (279.4) 53.50 (1358.9) (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 305 (138) 5
HLD (400 A)
HLD (400 A) 4
64.00 (1625.6)
53.00 (1346.2)
25.81 (655.6)
25.81 (655.6)
16.65 (422.9)
16.65 (422.9)
8.00 (203.2)
8.00 (203.2)
4.00 (101.6)
4.00 (101.6)
10.54 (267.7)
11.85 (301.0)
16.00 (406.4)
16.00 (406.4)
61.48 (1561.6)
50.48 (1282.2)
(1) 4/0–600
(2) 3/0–350
(2) #1–500
(2) #1–500
(6) 250–350
(6) 250–350
425 (193)
425 (193)
5
HLD (600 A) 64.00 (1625.6) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.54 (267.7) 16.00 (406.4) 61.48 (1561.6) (2) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 425 (193)
5
HLD (600 A) 4 64.00 (1625.6) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.54 (267.7) 16.00 (406.4) 61.48 (1561.6) (2) 400–500 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 425 (193)
HMDL (600 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.73 (450.3) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (2) #1–500 (2) #1–500 (12) 4/0–500 510 (232) 5
HMDL (800 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.73 (450.3) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (3) 3/0–400 (3) 3/0–400 (12) 4/0–500 510 (232)
NB (800–1000 A) 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 17.58 (446.5) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500 570 (259) 5
5
Power Panel and Transformer Panel
D
Power 5
Panel Type Height Width Depth
Gutter
Power
Space E
Power Panel 5
Panel Transformer HFD 11.00 (279.4) 17.00 (431.8) 6.81 (173.0)
Panel
HKD 24.50 (622.3) 11.88 (301.8) 17.50 (444.5)
5
Logic
Panel HLD 26.00 (660.4) 16.88 (428.8) 17.50 (444.5)
5
HMDL 36.25 (920.8) 16.88 (428.8) 17.50 (444.5)

B C
NB 36.25 (920.8) 16.88 (428.8) 19.00 (482.6) 5
Transformer Panel
G
HFD 22.00 (558.8) 16.50 (419.1) 6.50 (165.1) 5
5
HKD, HLD, HMDL and NB 28.63 (727.2) 8.25 (209.6) 5.50 (139.7)
Top of Lugs
on Power Panel F Notes
1 Consult factory for NEMA 4X.
2 Suitable for Cu or Al wire. Consult the factory for other available terminal sizes.
5
5
3 NTHE with multi-tap voltage selection panel.
4 Alternate line terminals.

H
5
A 5
5
5
5
Front View Side View 5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-47

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Contents
5 Molded Case–Based Transfer Switch
Description Page
5 Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
Open Transition, Manual
5 Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-41
Open Transition, Non-Automatic
5 Operation, 30–1000 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-45
Open Transition, Automatic
5 Operation, 30–1000 A
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-49
5 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-52
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-52
5 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-53
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-54
5
5
5
5 Open Transition, Automatic Operation, 30–1000 A
5 Product Description
Eaton’s molded case–based Industrial Highlights Optional Accessories
5 switch/circuit breaker ● Double-throw, ● Overcurrent protection
automatic transfer switch mechanically interlocked with thermal-magnetic trip
5 is designed to provide
unmatched performance,
transfer mechanism ● Integrated distribution
● High withstand and circuit breaker panel
5 reliability and versatility for
critical standby power
closing ratings ● Automatic controller
applications requiring open
● Front accessible protective cover with
5 transition with time delay. ● Top, bottom and side padlock provision
Transfer switches can be cable entry ● Surge protection device
5 equipped with an
ATC-100, ATC-300+ or
● Internal cable gutter space (UL 1449 3rd Edition)
● Field-selectable, multi-tap ● Remote annunciator
5 ATC-900 controller. transformer permits wide
range of system voltages
controller—monitor and
control single or multiple
Product Configuration automatic transfer
5 ● 30, 70, 100, 150, 200, 225,
● Manual operation under
load with permanently switches
300, 400, 600, 800, 1000 A Ethernet gateway with
5
●
affixed handle
● 100% rated ● Internal deadfront cover Web server (Modbus
Two-, three- or four-pole TCP/IP, SNMP, BACnet)
5
●
● Padlock provision
(fourth pole is fully rated) ● Space heater with
● Self-protecting switching thermostat
● Up to 600 Vac, 50/60 Hz
5 ● NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4X, open
contacts

5 Service entrance rated

●

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-48 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Features and Benefits
5
Standard and Optional Controller Features
Automatic Controllers 5
Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, Standard Standard Standard
5
self diagnostics and system settings
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard Standard Standard 5
Engine test and start contact
Dual source control power input
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
5
Liquid crystal display (LCD) — Standard Standard 5
Programmable set points and plant exerciser — Standard Standard
Password protection — Standard Standard 5
5
Time stamped history and event log — Standard Standard
Time delay bypass — Standard Standard
Go to source 2 control input — Standard Standard
5
Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs — Standard Standard
Lockout and monitor modes — Standard Standard 5
Source status output relay contacts — Standard Standard
Modbus RTU communication — Standard Standard 5
Manual retransfer control input
Source 2 input / load shed input
—
—
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
5
USB port—profile and data management — — Standard
5
Preferred source selection — — Standard
Dual generator capability — — Standard 5
User configurable inputs/outputs — — Standard
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting — — Standard 5
with pre-/post-event data capture
Integrated load metering — — Optional 5
Load management with selective load shed
DC voltage control power input
—
—
—
—
Optional
Optional
5
Three source ATS master/slave control — — Optional
5
Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 — Optional Optional

Note 5
1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-49

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Basic Components of Automatic Molded Case Transfer Switches

5
5 Source 1 and Load Power
Cable Connections
Automatic Transfer
Controller (ATC-300+)
■ Monitors Power Sources

5 Control Service
Disconnect (Service
■ Initiates Power Transfers

Equipment Rated
5 Switches Only)

Surge Suppression

5 Device (Optional)

Permanently Affixed

5 Manual Transfer
Handle Provides
Safe Manual Transfer

5 Under Full Load

Customer Control
5 Power Switching
Panel (With
Connections

Service Disconnect Switch

Deadfront Cover
5 Installed)
(Keyed) (Service Equipment
Rated Switches Only)

5 Source 2 Power
Cable Connections
Transformer Panel
■ Steps Line Power Down
to 120 Vac for Logic and

5 Electrical Operator
■ Available Multi-Tap
Voltage Selector
5 (See Page V2-T5-51 for
additional details)

5 Space Heater (Optional)

5
5 Eaton’s Superior Design Transfer
Switch Characteristics
Optional Integral Overcurrent
Protection Capability
5 Unmatched Performance
and Versatility
Fast, Powerful and
Safe Power Switching
For service entrance and
other applications, trip units
Eaton’s family of wallmount Mechanism can be integrated into the
5 transfer switches offers The power panel utilizes a power switching section.
unmatched performance, unidirectional gear motor This eliminates the need
5 versatility and value for power mechanism. The power panel for separate upstream
switching applications. At the can be operated manually protective devices, saving
5 heart of these designs is
Eaton’s molded case switch,
under a FULL LOAD. cost and space.

5 designed specifically to meet

UL 1008.
Molded Case Switch Features
● True four-pole switched
5 Superior Main
●
neutral availability
Totally enclosed contact
Contact Structure
assembly
5 All Eaton wallmount transfer
switches meet or exceed
the standards set forth in Optional Thermal-Magnetic or
5 UL 1008 and UL 489. No
Electronic Trip Units

other transfer switch Optional Service Entrance Rated

5 manufacturer has met the Automatic Transfer Switch
rigid testing requirements Eaton’s service entrance
5 of this combination of
standards. Completely
rated molded case breaker
design is a 100% rated ATS
5 enclosed contacts add a
measure of safety and
and UL 1008 Listed.
reliability. It also ensures
5 the integrity of the contact
assemblies and minimizes
5 the need for periodic
maintenance of the contacts,
5 reducing downtime.
Molded Case Switch

V2-T5-50 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Mechanical Interlock Multi-Tap Voltage Selector North American Voltage Selector
Wallmount transfer switches Eaton’s industry-exclusive North American multi-tap Simply remove the steel 5
feature a rear-mounted, Multi-Tap system voltage transformer comes with 600, cover and move the
fail-safe mechanical interlock selector allows our transfer 480, 240, 208 and 120 Vac, appropriate blue flag terminal 5
to prevent paralleling of switch to be applied on most single- and three-phase, and to the desired voltage. All
sources. This is, in addition system voltages just by proper 60 Hz taps, which are all field switches are shipped with 5
to software interlocking and insertion of the selector selectable. the blue flag in the 600 V
the interlocking inherently
provided by the transfer
plug. Available in two
configurations: Worldwide
position.
5
5
mechanism. Multi-Tap with 600, 480, 415,
380, 240, 220 and 208 Vac, Transformer Panel Location Transformer Panel Opened
single- and three-phase,
50 and 60 Hz taps. North 5
American Multi-Tap with
5
Transformer
600, 480, 240, 208 and Panel Allows
120 Vac, single- and three- for Easy Field

5
phase, 60 Hz taps. Changes to
Voltage
Transformer Configuration

5
Panel s

5
5
Typical (225–1000 A) Vertical Design Transfer Switch
Equipment 5
5
Load Lugs
(Top Entry)

Power Panel
Control 5
Multi-Tap Voltage Selector Power
Triple Interlocks
Ease of Maintenance
Disconnect
Switch 5
Load Bus Assembly
The load bus can be oriented
Keyed quick-disconnect
plugs are provided for
5
for either top or bottom Normal
easy and complete isolation
5
Power
access. Top entry is standard. Neutral
Source
of the control circuitry. Connections
Molded

5
Case
Maintenance can be Manual Switch
performed on the logic Operating
independent from the power
sections and still allow the
Handle

Service
5
user to manually transfer
5
Disconnect
power under full load Indicator
conditions. Wheel
5
Voltage
Selection
Panel

5
Load (Domestic)
Transfer
Bus
Mechanism

5
5
Load Bus
Motor Emergency Power
5
Brake Source Molded
Logic Disconnect Plugs Board Case Switch
5
Shown Without the Deadfront
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-51

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Standards and Certifications

5 ● UL 1008 Listed

5 CSA C22.2 No. 178

●

Certified

5 Seismic Zone 4 qualified

●

(CBC, IBC, UBC)

5 OSHPD certification
●

5
5
5
5 Catalog Number Selection
5 Automatic Molded Case Transfer Switch
5 AT V 3 KD A 3 0400 X S U
5
Type Certification
5 AT = Automatic U = UL listed
Voltage R = UL recognized
5 Orientation
Frame Size (Amperes) Amperes B
E
= 208 V, 60 Hz
= 600 V, 60 Hz
X = No listing
Molded case device 1 Number of Poles 0030 = 30 A
5 H = Horizontal
V = Vertical
FD = 30–150
KD = 225–300
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
0070
0100
= 70 A
= 100 A
G
H
= 220 V, 50/60 Hz
= 380 V, 50 Hz
Enclosure
LD = 400 0150 = 150 A O = 415 V, 50 Hz K = Open
5
4 = Four-pole 2 W = 240 V, 60 Hz S = NEMA 1
MD = 600 (three-pole only) 0200 = 200 A
Logic NB = 800–1000 2 0225 = 225 A X = 480 V, 60 Hz J = NEMA 12
0300 = 300 A R = NEMA 3R
5 1 = ATC-100
3 = ATC-300+
Switch 3
0320 = 320 A D = NEMA 4X
9 = ATC-900 0400 = 400 A

5 A
B
= S1 (MCS) S2 (MCS)
= S1 (MCB) S2 (MCB)
0600
0800
= 600 A 2
= 800 A
C = S1 (MCB) S2 (MCS) 1000 = 1000 A
5 D
X
= S1 (MCS) S2 (MCB)
= Fix mounted contactor

5 Notes
1 HFD = 200 and 225 A, HLD = 600 A, HMD = 800 A for 240/120 Vac single-phase, three-wire and 208Y/120 Vac three-phase, four-wire systems only.

5 2 Four-pole 600 A will use an NB breaker.

3 MCB = Molded Case Breaker, MCS = Molded Case Switch.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-52 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches
5.4
Technical Data and Specifications
5
Electrical Ratings
Note: For 600, 800 and 1000 A ratings, four-pole units are rated 35 kA at 5
480 volts. All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. For
alternate terminal sizes, contact Eaton. 5
Molded Case Transfer Switch 5
Wallmount Transfer Switch Standard Terminal Data
for Power Cable Connections 1
UL 1008 Short Circuit Withstand and Close-On Ratings (kA) 5
Ratings When Used With
Switch
Ampere Breaker
Line Side
(Normal and Load Neutral
Transfer
Switch
Short Circuit Upstream Fuse (kA)
Maximum Fuse
5
Rating Frame Standby Source) Connection Connection
30–100 HFD (1) #14–1/0 (1) #14–1/0 (3) #14–1/0
Rating (A)
30
240 V
100
480 V
65
600 V
25
Fuse Rating
200
Type 2
J,T
600 V
200
5
150–225 HFD (1) #6–300 (1) #6–300 (3) #4–300 70 100 65 25 200 J,T 200 5
150–225 HKD (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 100 100 65 25 200 J,T 200
225–300 HKD (1) #3–350 (1) #6–350 (3) #4–350 150 100 65 25 400 J,T 200 5
400 HLD (1) 4/0–600 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350
5
200 100 65 25 400 J,T 200
600 HLD (1) 3/0–350 (2) #1–500 (6) 250–350 225 100 65 35 400 J,T 200
600
600 (four-pole)
HMDL
NB
(2) #1–500
(3) 3/0–400
(2) #1–500
(3) 3/0–400
(12) 4/0–500
(3) 3/0–400
300 100 65 35 400 J,T 200
5
400 100 65 35 600 J,T 200
800 HMDL (3) 3/0–400 (3) 3/0–400 (12) 4/0–500 600 100/65 3 65/50 4 35/25 5 800/1200 J,T 100/200 5
800 HNB (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500 800 65 50 25 1200/1600 L 100/200
1000 HNB (4) 4/0–500 (4) 4/0–500 (12) 4/0–500 1000 65 50 25 1600 L 200 5
Notes
1 All terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
5
5
For alternate terminal sizes, contact Eaton.
2 Class R fuse with 100 kA rating.
3 HMDL frame rated 100 kA. HNB frame rated 65 kA.
4 HMDL frame rated 65 kA. HNB frame rated 50 kA.
5 HMDL frame rated 35 kA. HNB frame rated 25 kA.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-53

 5.4 Transfer Switches
Molded Case–Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 Dimension Views

5 B C
G

5 Top of Lugs
on Power Panel F
5
5
5 D H
A
Gutter

5 Space E
Power
Panel Transformer
Panel

5 Logic
Panel

5
Top View Front View Side View
5
5 Automatic Molded Case Transfer Switches—NEMA 1, 3R, 12 1
Enclosure Gutter Space Bolt Pattern Standard Terminals 2
Switch
5 Rating Switch A B C D E G H Line Side (Normal Load and Neutral Weight
Amperes Type Height Width Depth Width Depth Horizontal Vertical Standby Source) Connection Connection Lb (kg)

5 Molded Case
30–100 HFD 3 47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.75 (273.0) 46.44 (1180.0) — — — 232 (105)
5 150–225 HFD 3 47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.75 (273.0) 46.44 (1180.0) — — — 232 (105)

5 30–100
150
HFD 4
HFD 4
47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.75 (273.0) 46.44 (1180.0) —
47.74 (1213.0) 20.81 (528.6) 15.22 (386.6) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.75 (273.0) 46.44 (1180.0) —
—
—
—
—
232 (105)
232 (105)

5 150–225 HFD 3 35.61 (904.0) 20.06 (509.5) 11.34 (288.0) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 10.75 (273.0) 34.31 (904.0) — — — 150 (68)
150–225 HKD 56.00 (1422.4) 20.81 (528.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 11.00 (279.4) 45.50 (1155.7) — — — 305 (134)
5 300 HKD 53.00 (1346.2) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 53.50 (1358.9) — — — 295 (134)
400 HLD 64.00 (1625.6) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 61.48 (1561.6) — — — 425 (193)
5 400 HLD 3 53.00 (1346.0) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 51.50 (1308.0) — — — 425 (193)

5 600
600
HLD
HMDL
64.00 (1625.6) 25.81 (655.6) 16.65 (422.9) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 62.50 (1588.0) —
76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) —
—
—
—
—
475 (214)
480 (218)

5 800 HMDL 3 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) — — — 510 (232)
800–1000 HNB 76.74 (1949.2) 25.81 (655.6) 17.75 (450.8) 8.00 (203.2) 4.00 (101.6) 16.00 (406.4) 75.15 (1908.8) — — — 570 (259)
5 Notes

5
1 Consult factory for NEMA 4X.
2 Suitable with copper only.
3 Alternate line terminals.

5 4 With multi-tap voltage selection panel.

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-54 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.5
Contents
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
Description Page
5
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-56 5
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-60
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-60 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-60
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-61 5
5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-62

5
5
5
5
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A 5
Product Description Application Description 5
Eaton’s Magnum power Product Configuration Design Highlights The Magnum family of
frame–based transfer ● 200, 300, 400, 600, 800, ● Freestanding enclosure transfer switches covers 5
switches are designed for a 1000, 1200, 1600, 2000, ● High withstand closing applications ranging from 200
variety of standby power
applications for critical and
2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, ratings to 5000 A through 600 Vac.
Some of the applications are:
5
5000 A ● 100 kA short-circuit
noncritical loads. They
monitor both Source 1
● Three- or four-pole
(fourth pole is fully rated)
rating
automatic or non-automatic
configurations, open or 5
(Normal) and Source 2
● 85 kA short-time rating closed transition and standard
(Emergency) power sources.
● Up to 600 Vac, 60 Hz or
50/60 Hz
(0.5 sec) or rated suitable for use as 5
In the event of a Source 1 ● Dual drawout on ATS service entrance. They are
power interruption, these
switches will automatically
● NEMA 1, 3R and bypass designed for applications
where total system
5
● Service entrance rated ● Deadfront
transfer the load circuits to
the Source 2 power source.
● Manual transfer under
coordination must be
accomplished while achieving
5
load
Once Source 1 power source a high level of Withstand,
has been restored, the
● Electrically operated Interrupting, and Closing 5
process is automatically ● Magnum stored energy performance.
reversed. mechanism
Drawout construction is
5
● Quick make / quick
Magnum transfer switches
use the Eaton programmable ●
break switching
Multi-tap transformer
available for applications,
such as critical life-support 5
ATC-900 automatic controller. systems, where preventive
● True four-pole switched
neutral
maintenance, inspection 5
and testing must be
Mechanically interlocked
5
●
accomplished while
● Integral overcurrent trip maintaining continuity of
option
● Integrated service
power to the load.
5
entrance rating option
100% rated per UL 1008 5
● OSHPD listed
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-55

 5.5 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Features, Benefits and Functions

5
Standard Features Optional Features Unmatched Performance Ease of Coordination
5 ● ATC-900 controller ● Available UL 1449 Third and Versatility and Application—
Short-Time Withstand
● Drawout cassette on ATS Edition surge protection The Eaton family of Magnum
5 and bypass device (SPD) transfer switches offers
unmatched performance,
Closing Rating
The use of electronic trips
● Source available contacts: ● Automatic transfer
5 ● Source 1 available
1NO/1NC
operation with selectable
(via programming)
versatility and value for
standby power applications.
has allowed performance
curve shaping to facilitate
nonautomatic or automatic At the heart of these designs proper system coordination.
5 ● Source 2 available
1NO/1NC retransfer with fail-safe is the Magnum switch with
the following features: To facilitate improved
● Space heater with
5 ● Switch position contacts:
thermostat Superior Main
coordination, Eaton Magnum
transfer switches are
● Source 1 position
● Digital multi-function Contact Structure UL 1008 Listed with a
5 ●
1NO/1NC
Source 2 position
power quality metering All Eaton Magnum Transfer Short-Time Withstand Closing
● DC power input for Rating of 85 kA at 0.5 secs
5 1NO/1NC Switches meet or exceed
uninterrupted monitoring the standards set forth in (30 cycles) up to 600V.
● Source 1 and Source 2 of ATS status UL 1008 and UL 1066 with
5 sensing:
● Undervoltage/
● Integrated load metering high withstand, totally
● Expandable I/O (up to enclosed Magnum switches.
underfrequency
5 ● Overvoltage/ 20 I/O total) No other transfer switch
manufacturer has met the
overfrequency ● EtherNet TCP/IP
5 ● Field-programmable time
communications rigid testing requirements of
this combination of standards.
delays ● Integrated service Completely enclosed contacts
5 ● Time delay engine start
entrance option with add a measure of safety and
100% rated per UL 1008 reliability. They also ensure
● Time delay normal to
5 emergency
● Optional remote
annunciator
the integrity of the contact
● Time emergency to assemblies and minimize
5 normal the need for periodic
maintenance of the contacts,
● Time delay engine Magnum Power Switch
5 cooldown
reducing downtime and
maintenance time.
● Time delay emergency Optional Integral
5 failure Fast, Powerful and Safe
Switching Mechanism
Overcurrent Protection
Capability
● LCD color-based display
5 for programming, system The mechanism uses a high
diagnostics and Help menu speed stored energy
5 ● Mimic diagram with source switching mechanism. This
mechanism can be operated
available and connected
manually under a FULL LOAD.
5 LED indication
● Four programmable inputs
5 ●
and outputs
Modbus RTU
5 ●
communication
USB port for set point
5 downloads and event
recording uploads Optional DigitripTM Trip Unit

Password-protected
5
●

access to control functions

and set point programming
5 ● Two automatic plant
exercisers—load or no
5 load, daily, 7-, 14-,
28-day or calendar date
5 operation, 0–600 minute
runtime

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-56 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.5
UL 1008 100% Rated Controller Primary Controller Diagnostics and Eaton’s drawout Magnum
Service Entrance Functions Troubleshooting switch should be considered 5
For service entrance and The ATC-900 Automatic Eaton’s ATC-900 controller for any systems requiring
other applications, Digitrip Transfer Switch Controller provides users with data either greater redundancy, 5
solid-state trip units can be offers these standard features: required to quickly identify easier maintainability, or
integrated into the power ● Monitor normal and the root cause of a backup where true selective
coordination is desired.
5
switching section. This emergency source power system failure and
eliminates the need for
separate upstream protective
voltages and frequencies minimize system downtime.
With the DCT module, the
Eaton’s drawout Magnum 5
● Provide transfer and switch provides the capability
devices, saving cost and
space. Available with various
re-transfer control signals
ATC-900 stores 4 seconds of
metered data every 20 msec
to isolate either of the two
power sources (Source 1 or
5
combinations of long, short
● Provide engine/generator for certain events. The data is
time, instantaneous, ground starting and shutdown captured 2 seconds before
Source 2) and its associated
logic while maintaining power 5
fault protection and signals and 2 seconds after the event to the load.
communication. Overcurrent ● Permit customer
programming of
(except for a power failure, 5
trip selection can be made which is 4 seconds before). Each switching section is
from the series of Eaton
Digitrip RMS trip units ●
operational set points
Display real-time and
Oscillographic data for 10
events is stored in the
independent and can be
replaced either with a spare
5
switch, or for less critical
5
including the standard historical information controller and may be
Digitrip 520 or optional 520M, ● Permit system testing downloaded over USB or replacement needs, a
520MC or 1150. displayed graphically. replacement unit is available
Store customer and
5
●
from the factory.
Controller Logic factory-established
Magnum Fixed Mount
parameters in nonvolatile
The ATC-900 Automatic
Transfer Switch Controller
memory
Transfer Switch Ease of Maintenance
Keyed quick-disconnect plugs
5
● Provide faceplate source
from Eaton is a
comprehensive, multi- status indication
are provided for easy and
complete isolation of the 5
function, microprocessor- ● Provides an LCD-based control circuitry.
based automatic transfer display for programming
Maintenance can be
5
switch controller and meter. and status readout
It is designed to accurately
Controller Flexible
performed on the logic
independent from the power 5
monitor power sources and
Configurations sections and still allow the
provide the necessary
intelligence to reliably operate The ATC-900 controller user to manually transfer 5
includes four programmable power under full load
a transfer switch through a
series of programmed inputs and outputs as a conditions. 5
sensing and timing functions. standard offering. The inputs
The ATC-900 provides an and outputs can be assigned 5
unmatched degree of functions from a preset list of
programming flexibility to options, either at the factory
or in the field. Additional I/O
5
address the needs of any 2000 A, Four-Pole, NEMA 1 Enclosed,
system. can be added at any time by
adding an external I/O
Through-the-Door Design
5
Controller Communications module. Each I/O module
Every ATC-900 controller contains four inputs and 5
includes a standard Modbus outputs, and up to four
RTU communications modules can be daisy chained Logic Disconnect Plugs 5
interface with an option to to the ATC-900 controller.
upgrade to Modbus TCP/IP. 5
The ATC-900 is also
compatible with Eaton’s 5
Power Xpert Gateway for
web-based monitoring,
Modbus TCP/IP, SNMP or
5
BACnet®/IP. The Power
Xpert Gateway can be used 5
to consolidate data from up
to 64 devices, including 5
communications ready
transfer switch controllers, 5
trip units and meters, as well
as other Eaton devices.
Versions of the Power Xpert 2000 A Three-Pole Fixed Design NEMA
5
Behind-the-Door Enclosure
Gateway include email event
notification and data-logging 5
functionality.
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-57

 5.5 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Deadfronts Multi-Tap Voltage Selector ATC-900 Controller Features

5 The Magnum transfer switch Allows the transfer switch to Automatic
comes standard with two be readily applied on most Controller
5 deadfront panels mounted system voltages worldwide Description ATC-900
over the Magnum power by connecting to the proper
5 switch or power circuit terminals. Available system
Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, self diagnostics
and system settings
Standard

breaker. These deadfronts voltages include 120, 208,

5
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard
provide additional protection 220, 240, 380, 415, 480, or
isolation from any power 600 Vac, 50 or 60 Hz. Engine test and start contact Standard

5 connections. The power

connections for Source 1,
Dual source control power input Standard
Liquid crystal display (LCD) Standard
Source 2 and Load
5 connections are all in the Programmable set points and plant exerciser Standard
back compartment of the Password protection Standard
5 transfer switch. Time stamped history and event log Standard
Interlocking for Open
5 Transition Applications
Time delay bypass
Go to source 2 control input
Standard
Standard
The open transition type
5 Magnum transfer switches Voltage Selection Terminals
Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs Standard

feature both mechanical Lockout and monitor modes Standard

5 (cable) and electrical Source status output relay contacts Standard
interlocking to prevent Modbus RTU communication Standard
5 paralleling of sources.
Manual retransfer control input Standard

5 Source 2 input / load shed input

USB port—profile and data management
Standard
Standard

5 Preferred source selection Standard

Dual generator capability Standard
5 User configurable inputs/outputs Standard

5
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting with pre-/post-event Standard
data capture
Integrated load metering Optional
5 Load management with selective load shed Optional

5 Mechanical Cable Interlock DC voltage control power input

Three source ATS master/slave control
Optional
Optional

5 Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 Optional

Note
5 1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-58 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.5
Typical Layout
5
Power Panel
Performs Power Transfer Between Source 1 and Source 2 5
Using Magnum Power Switches or Power Circuit Breakers
5
5
5
5
5
5
Side-to-Side
Ledge
Side-to-Side
Ledge 5
Contact Wear 5
Contact Wear Inspection Area
Inspection
Area (Ledge
(Ledge Now
Becoming Visible
5
Not Visible Under Contacts)
Under Contacts)
Contact Wear Contact Wear 5
Electrical Operator Indicator— Indicator—
Pushbutton Contacts Closed
and in Good
Contacts Closed
and Wear
5
Condition is Indicated

Basic Switch Components of Magnum Automatic Transfer Switches

5
5
5
5
Source 1
Connections
5
5
5
Neutral

Load
Connections
5
Connections
5
5
5
5
Source 2
Connections 5
Side View of Magnum Bottom
5
Neutral
Side or Rear Access Required Entry Area Assembly
(Half-High Side Panels and Back Panels are Not Shown)

Magnum-Based Transfer Switches 5

5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-59

 5.5 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Standards and Certifications Product Selection Catalog Number:

5 Eaton Magnum transfer ● NEC Articles—517, 700, Eaton transfer switch ATV9MGB33200XRU with
Optional Features 16B and 37B
switches meet or exceed 701, 702, 708 equipment offers flexibility
5 all industry standards for ● NFPA 110 and versatility to the system The example above would
endurance, reliability and designer and user. All specify the following:
5 NFPA 99
●
performance. They are switches include the basic ● Automatic transfer switch
listed under Underwriters
● NEMA ICS10—Standard features necessary for
Vertical configuration
5
●
Laboratories UL 1008 for transfer switch normal operation as standard.
Standard for transfer switch equipment Eaton also offers an extensive ● ATC-900 controller
ISO® 9000—International
5
●
equipment. With certain array of optional features/ ● Magnum DS frame
options, they also comply Organization for accessories that allows the ● Fixed mount
with Source 2 and standby Standardization user to customize a new
5 system requirements as ● BOCA—Building Officials transfer switch to match
●

●
Three-pole
3200 A
defined in NFPA 99 for Code Administrators the application. Select
5 healthcare facilities. ● Seismic certified OSHPD, the appropriate catalog ● 480 V
CBC, IBC, UBC number for the application. ● NEMA 1 enclosure
UL 1008—standard for
5
●
Then choose any optional ● UL listed
safety for automatic features/accessories needed
transfer switches up to ● Integral overcurrent
5 4000 A; 5000 A available as
to complete the project
requirements.
protection both sources
UL 891 only ● Service entrance rated with
5 ● CSA 22.2-178—Canadian ground fault protection if
service entrance rating
transfer switch standard
5 ●
was selected
Seismic qualified
5
Catalog Number Selection
5 Using the catalog numbering system provides an overview of the ten basic
style/feature categories that generate the 15-digit catalog number.
5
Automatic and Non-Automatic Power Frame Transfer Switches 200–5000 A
5 AT V 9 MG B 3 3200 X R U
5
Type Listing
5 AT = Automatic U = UL listed
CT = Closed Logic CSA listed
5 transition
NT = Non-auto
9 = ATC-900
Switch
Poles
Amperes
E = Electromechanical A = Fixed mount, power 0200 = 200 A 1600 = 1600 A Enclosure
5 Orientation
switch PS both
B = Fixed mount, power
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
0300 = 300 A
0400 = 400 A
2000 = 2000 A
2500 = 2500 A K = Open 3
Frame circuit breaker 4 = Four-pole 0600 = 600 A 3000 = 3000 A S = NEMA 1
5 V = Vertical MG = Magnum DS PCB both
C = Fixed mount, PCB
0800 = 800 A
1000 = 1000 A
3200 = 3200 A
4000 = 4000 A 1
R = NEMA 3R
T = Through-door design
normal, PS emergency 1200 = 1200 A 5000 = 5000 A 12
5 D = Fixed mount,
PS normal, PCB
Voltage
5 emergency
E = Drawout, PS both A = 120 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
F = Drawout, PCB both B = 208/120 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
5 G = Drawout, PCB normal,
PS emergency
E = 600 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
E = 600 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
H = Drawout, PS normal, G = 220/127 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
5 PCB emergency H = 380/220 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
O = 415/240 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire

5 W = 240/120 V, 60 Hz, single-phase, three-wire

W = 240 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
W = 240/120 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire hi-leg
5 Legend:
PS = Power Switch
X = 480 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
X = 480/277 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
X = 480/240 V, 50 Hz, single-phase, two-wire
5 PCB = Power Circuit Breaker

Notes
5 1 4000 A and 5000 A available as drawout configuration only.
2 UL 891 Listed.

5
3 Available on fixed-mounted units up to 3200 A.

V2-T5-60 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.5
Technical Data and Specifications
5
Floor-Standing Magnum Magnum Drawout Transfer Transfer Switch Withstand Closing Current Ratings
Transfer Switch Switches
Transfer Switch Short-Circuit 0.05 sec Short-Time 0.5 sec 5
● Ambient temperature Automatic and Ampere Rating up to 600 Vac (kA) up to 600 Vac (kA) 1
range: –40 °C to 40 °C
(–40 °F to 104 °F)
Non-Automatic
Transfer Switches
UL 1008 5
● Operating temperature
range: –20 °C to 70 °C
Enclosures meet all current
applicable NEMA and UL
200
300
100
100
85
85
5
standards for conduit entry,
●
(–4 °F to 158 °F)
Operating humidity: cable bending, gutter space
400 100 85 5
and shielding of live 600 100 85

●
up to 90%
Relative humidity
components. 800 100 85 5
1000 100 85
(noncondensing) NEMA 1 and
NEMA 3R Enclosures 1200 100 85 5
Magnum Drawout Magnum transfer switches
Transfer Switch are supplied with a front door
1600
2000
100
100
85
85
5
● 200–5000 A only. The NEMA 3R are
● Two-, three-, four-pole provided with a door within
a door design.
2500 100 85 5
(except 4000 A: three- 3000 100 85
and four-pole only) The Magnum transfer 3200 100 85 5
● 120–600 Vac switch requires rear access.
5
4000 100 —
If placed against a wall, then
Magnum Fixed-Mount a minimum of 3 feet is UL 891
Transfer Switch
● 200–3200 A
needed as well as side
access on at least one of the
4000 — 85 2
5
5000 — 85 2
Two-, three-, four-pole sides. Access to cable space
5
●

(except 3200 A: two- and can be via the side, bottom, Notes
three-pole only) top or rear. 1 Ratings used for coordination with upstream breakers with short-time ratings.

● 120–600 Vac
2 UL 1066 short-time withstand rating.
5
Optional Service Entrance Rated
Automatic Transfer Switch 5
Eaton’s service entrance
rated power circuit breaker
design is a 100% rated ATS
5
and UL 1008 Listed up to
4000 A. 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-61

 5.5 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Dimensions
5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5 Magnum Fixed-Mount Transfer Switches 200–3200 A Fixed-Mount NEMA 1

5
Number Shipping
Ampere of A B C Weight B C
Rating Poles Height Width Depth Lb (kg)
5 NEMA 1 Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch
200–2000 2 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 1050 (477)
5 200–2000 3 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 48.00 (1219.2) 1050 (477)

5 200–2000
2500–3200
4
2
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
32.00 (812.8)
44.00 (1117.6)
48.00 (1219.2)
48.00 (1219.2)
1250 (568)
1900 (863)
A
5 2500–3200 3 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 48.00 (1219.2) 1900 (863)
2500–3200 4 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 48.00 (1219.2) 2000 (910)
5 4000 1 — 1 1 1 1

5
5000 1 — 1 1 1 1

NEMA 3R Enclosed Fixed-Mount Transfer Switch

5 200–2000 2 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 63.00 (1600.2) 1600 (726)

200–2000 3 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 63.00 (1600.2) 1600 (726)
5 200–2000 4 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 63.00 (1600.2) 1800 (817) 200–3200 A Fixed-Mount NEMA 3R
2500–3200 2 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 63.00 (1600.2) 2400 (1090)
5
B C
2500–3200 3 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 63.00 (1600.2) 2400 (1090)

5 2500–3200
4000
4
—
90.00 (2286.0)
1
44.00 (1117.6)
1
63.00 (1600.2)
1
2500 (1135)
—

5 5000 — 1 1 1 —

Note
5 1 At 4000 and 5000 A, the standard design is drawout. See drawout dimensions. A

5
5
5
5 D Door Within a Door Design

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-62 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.5
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
5
Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches 200–3200 A Drawout NEMA 1
Number Shipping
B C
5
Ampere of A B C Weight
Rating Poles Height Width Depth Lb (kg)
5
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
200–2000 2 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 1600 (727) 5
200–2000 3 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 1600 (727)
200–2000 4 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 1900 (864) 5
2500–3200
2500–3200
2
3
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
44.00 (1117.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
44.00 (1117.6) 60.00 (1524.0)
2500 (1136)
2500 (1136)
A 5
2500–3200 4 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 2800 (1273) 5
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
200–2000 2 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 2100 (953) 5
5
200–2000 3 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 2100 (953)
200–2000 4 90.00 (2286.0) 32.00 (812.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 2400 (1090)
2500–3200 2 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 3000 (1362)
5
2500–3200 3 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 3000 (1362) 200–3200 A Drawout NEMA 3R
2500–3200 4 90.00 (2286.0) 44.00 (1117.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 3300 (1498) 5
5
5
A
5
5
5
5
D Door Within a Door Design
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-63

 5.5 Transfer Switches
Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5
Magnum 4000–5000 A Units
5 Wireway Cubicle ATS Cubicle

5 SP C

5
5 Source 1
(Normal)

5
5
5 Load
A
5
5
5
5
Source 2
5
5 Front View With Covers Right Side View

5 Emergency Lugs —
Located in Rear of Cubicle
Connection Type (4000–5000 A Only)
Connection Type

5 Line Emergency Load Wireway

Cable Cable Cable Yes
5 Source 1
Bus Cable Cable Yes
Normal Cable Bus Cable Yes
5
(Normal)
Lugs
Cable Cable Bus Yes

5 Bus Bus Cable No

Bus Cable Bus No

5 Cable Bus Bus No

Load Bus Bus Bus No
5 Lugs

Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches

5 No. Shipping
Ampere of A B C1 D Weight
5 Wireway
Rating Poles Height Width Width Depth Lb (kg)
4000 3 or 4 90.00 86.00 92.00 68.00 2
Cubicle
5 Source 2
(Emergency)
(2286.0) (2184.4) (2336.8) (1727.2)
5000 3 or 4 90.00 86.00 92.00 68.00 2

5 32.00 (812.8) 54.00 (1371.6)

(2286.0) (2184.4) (2336.8) (1727.2)

Notes
5
B
1 Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches
C
(152.4 mm) to width.
Front View Without Covers
5 SP = Shipping Split.
2 Consult factory.

Consult factory for dimensions.

5 Note: The typical Magnum ATS at 4000 and 5000 A ratings will include one cubicle with the Source 1 and Source 2 power switches or power

5
circuit breakers. A second cubicle called a wireway is required unless bus is used for the connections per Connection Type table above. Cable
connections to the wireway cubicle can be made from the top or bottom. The wireway cubicle will have removable panels on the front, and cable
connections may be made from the top or the bottom. Cable connections to the power switch or power circuit breakers cubicle are made from
5 the back. Consult factory for dimensions. The wireway width is 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).

V2-T5-64 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.6
Contents
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
Description Page
5
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches 5
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-67 5
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-67
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-68 5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-68
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-69 5
5
5
5
5
5
Open and Closed Transition, 200–5000 A 5
Product Description Features 5
Eaton’s bypass isolation Design Highlights Standard Features ● Four programmable inputs
transfer switch is used in life ● High withstand ratings ● ATC-900 controller and outputs 5
safety and other mission- ● 100 kA short-circuit rating ● Drawout cassette on ATS ● Standard Modbus 485
critical applications where
redundancy is desired and
(0.05 sec, up to 600 Vac) and bypass ● Password-protected 5
● 85 kA short-time rating ● Source available contacts: access to control functions
maintenance of the automatic
transfer switch can be
(0.5 sec, up to 600 Vac) ● Source 1 available and set point programming 5
performed without
● Dual drawout—ATS and 1NO/1NC ● Two automatic plant
interrupting power to the
●
bypass
Deadfront
● Source 2 available exercisers—load or no
load, daily, 7, 14, 28 or
5
load. Transfer switches are 1NO/1NC
equipped with the ATC-900
controller.
● Manual transfer under load ● Switch position contacts:
calendar date operation,
0–600 minute runtime 5
● Electrically operated ● Source 1 position
Product Configuration
● Magnum stored energy
mechanism
1NO/1NC 5
● Source 2 position Optional Features
● 200, 300, 400, 600, 800,
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000,
● Quick make / quick break
switching
1NO/1NC ● Available UL 1449 Third
Edition surge protection
5
2500, 3000, 3200, 4000 ● Source 1 and Source 2
Multi-tap transformer
5
●
and 5000 A sensing: device (SPD)
● Fully rated fourth-pole ● Automatic transfer
● Three- or four-pole (fourth ● Undervoltage/
(switched neutral)
pole is fully rated)
● Mechanically interlocked
underfrequency operation with selectable
(via programming) 5
● Up to 600 Vac, 60 Hz ● Overvoltage/
Integral overcurrent trip nonautomatic or automatic
5
●
or 50/60 Hz overfrequency
option retransfer with fail-safe
● NEMA 1, 3R ● Field-programmable
● Integrated service ● Space heater with
● Service entrance rated entrance rating option time delays thermostat 5
● Time delay engine start ● Digital multi-function
● Time delay normal to power quality metering 5
emergency ● DC power input for
● Time emergency to normal uninterrupted monitoring 5
● Time delay engine cooldown of ATS status
● Time delay emergency ● Integrated load metering 5
failure ● Expandable I/O (up to 20
● LCD color-based display for I/O total) 5
programming, system ● Ethernet TCP/IP

●
diagnostics and Help menu
Mimic diagram with source
communications 5
available and connected
LED indication
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-65

 5.6 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

ATC-900 Controller Features

5 Automatic
Controller
5 Description ATC-900

5 Basic transfer control, plant exerciser, time delays, self diagnostics

and system settings
Standard

5
Source mimic diagram with LED indication Standard
Engine test and start contact Standard

5 Dual source control power input Standard

Liquid crystal display (LCD) Standard
5 Programmable set points and plant exerciser Standard
Password protection Standard
5 Time stamped history and event log Standard

5 Time delay bypass

Go to source 2 control input
Standard
Standard

5 Pre-transfer and general alarm control outputs Standard

Lockout and monitor modes Standard
5 Source status output relay contacts Standard
Modbus RTU communication Standard
5 Magnum Bypass Isolation Front View without the Manual retransfer control input Standard
Deadfront Panels—NEMA 1 Through the Door
5 Source 2 input / load shed input
USB port—profile and data management
Standard
Standard

5 Preferred source selection Standard

Dual generator capability Standard
5 User configurable inputs/outputs Standard

5
Advanced diagnostics and troubleshooting with pre-/post-event Standard
data capture
Integrated load metering Optional
5 Load management with selective load shed Optional

5 DC voltage control power input

Three source ATS master/slave control
Optional
Optional

5 Modbus TCP/IP communication 1 Optional

Note
5 1 Modbus TCP/IP option requires use of Modbus RTU port.

5
5
5
5 Front Access Option 54 A is Available on All Magnum Designs

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-66 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.6
Standards and Certifications
● UL 1008 Listed up to 4000 A Eaton transfer switch B. In standby systems, in
5
equipment is listed for accordance with Article
UL 891 5000 A ratings
5
●

● Seismic Zone 4 qualified application by UL and CSA 702 of the NEC and/or
and intended for use in
●
(CBC, IBC, UBC)
OSHPD certification
locations to provide power C. In legally required standby
systems in accordance
5
as follows:
5
with Article 701 of the
A. In emergency systems, NEC. Eaton ATSs are
in accordance with available to meet NFPA
Articles 517 and 700 in 110 for emergency and 5
the National Electrical standby power systems,
Code (NEC), American
National Standards
and NFPA 99 for health-
care facilities when
5
Institute/National Fire
Protection Association
ordered with the
appropriate options. 5
(ANSI/NFPA) 70 and the
NFPA No. 76A and/or D. In Critical Operations 5
Systems (COPS) in
accordance with Article
708 of the NEC.
5
5
Catalog Number Selection
Using the catalog numbering system provides an overview of the ten basic 5
style/feature categories that generate the 15-digit catalog number.
5
Bypass Isolation Magnum Power Frame Transfer Switches 200–5000 A
5
BI V 9 MG E 3 3200 X R U
5
Type Listing
5
BI = Bypass open U = UL listed

5
transition Logic CSA listed
CB = Closed transition/ 9= ATC-900 Switch Amperes
bypass isolation Poles
5
E = Drawout, PS both 0200 = 200 A 1600 = 1600 A Enclosure
F = Drawout, PCB both 2 = Two-pole 0300 = 300 A 2000 = 2000 A
Frame G = Drawout, PCB normal, 3 = Three-pole 0400 = 400 A 2500 = 2500 A S = NEMA 1
Orientation
R = NEMA 3R
5
MG = Magnum DS PS emergency 4 = Four-pole 0600 = 600 A 3200 = 3200 A
V = Vertical H = Drawout, PS normal, 0800 = 800 A 4000 = 4000 A T = Through-door design
PCB emergency 1000 = 1000 A 5000 = 5000 A 1
1200 = 1200 A 5
Voltage 5
B = 208/120 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
E
E
= 600 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
= 600 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
5
G = 220/127 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
H
O
= 380/220 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
= 415/240 V, 50 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
5
W
W
= 240/120 V, 60 Hz, single-phase, three-wire
= 240 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire 5
W = 240/120 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire hi-leg
Legend:
PS = Power Switch
X
X
= 480 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, three-wire
= 480/277 V, 60 Hz, three-phase, four-wire
5
X = 480/240 V, 50 Hz, single-phase, two-wire
5
PCB = Power Circuit Breaker

Note
1 UL 891 Listed.
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-67

 5.6 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications

5 Eaton transfer switch Catalog Number:
equipment offers flexibility BIV9MGE33200XRU Typical Bypass Isolation Switch Schematic
5 and versatility to the system The example above would INCOMING
designer and user. All specify the following: SOURCE 1
5 switches include the basic
● Bypass isolation
features necessary for
5 normal operation as standard.
Eaton also offers an extensive
● Vertical configuration
● ATC-900 controller
5 array of optional features/
accessories that allows the
● Magnum DS frame SOURCE 1
ISOLATED

user to customize a new

● Power switch normal ATS SOURCE 1
5 transfer switch to match and emergency SOURCE 1 BYPASS

the application. Select ● Drawout

5
SOURCE 1 SOURCE 1
the appropriate catalog ● Three-pole POSITION BYPASS

number for the application. LOAD

● 3200 A A
5 Then choose any optional
features/accessories needed
● 480 V SOURCE 1
AVAILABLE
● NEMA 3R enclosure
5 to complete the project
requirements. ● UL listed

5 SOURCE 2
ISOLATED
ATS SOURCE 2
SOURCE 2 BYPASS
5 SOURCE 2
POSITION SOURCE 2
INCOMING
5
BYPASS
SOURCE 2
A

5
SOURCE 2
AVAILABLE

5 Transfer Switch Withstand Closing Current Ratings

5 Transfer Switch
Ampere Rating
Short-Circuit 0.05 sec
up to 600 Vac (kA)
Short-Time 0.5 sec
up to 600 Vac (kA) 1

5 UL 1008
200 100 85
5 300 100 85
400 100 85
5 600 100 85

5 800
1000
100
100
85
85

5 1200 100 85
1600 100 85
5 2000 100 85

5
2500 100 85
3000 100 85

5 3200 100 85
4000 100 —

5 UL 891
4000 — 85 2
5 5000 — 85 2

5 Notes
1 Ratings used for coordination with upstream breakers with short-time ratings.

5
2 UL 1066 short-time withstand rating.

5
5
5

V2-T5-68 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches
5.6
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5
Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches 200–3200 A Drawout NEMA 1 5
Ampere
Number
of A B C
Shipping
Weight
B C 5
Rating Poles Height Width Depth Lb (kg)
NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch 5
200–2000
200–2000
2
3
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 3100 (1409)
64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 3100 (1409)
5
200–2000 4 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 3700 (1682)
A
5
2500–3200 2 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 4700 (2136)
2500–3200 3 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 4700 (2136) 5
2500–3200 4 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 60.00 (1524.0) 5500 (2500)
NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
5
200–2000 2 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 4100 (1861)
5
200–2000 3 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 4100 (1861)
200–2000 4 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 4700 (2134) 5
2500–3200 2 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 5700 (2588)
2500–3200 3 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 5700 (2588)
200–3200 A Drawout NEMA 3R
5
5
2500–3200 4 90.00 (2286.0) 64.00 (1625.6) 75.00 (1905.0) 6500 (2951)
B C
Note: Add 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) to the height, 6.00 inches (152.4 mm)
to the width and 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) to the depth to all enclosure
dimensions to account for the seismic mounting brackets.
5
5
5
A
5
5
Door Within
a Door Design 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-69

 5.6 Transfer Switches
Bypass Isolation Power Frame–Based Transfer Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5
Magnum 4000–5000 A Units—NEMA 1
5 Source 2 Emergency Lugs
Note: The 4000 and 5000 A bypass
5 isolation ATS will include two cubicles
for the Source 1 and Source 2 Normal
5 and the Bypass power switch. An
additional cubicle called a wireway is
provided for the Normal and Load
5 A
connections. The wireway cubicle will
have removable panels on the front,
5 Note: Seismic mounting
and cable connections may be made
from the top or the bottom. Cable
brackets add 3.00 inches (76.2) connections for Emergency are made
5 32.00 54.00 54.00
width to each side or an
additional 6.00 inches (152.4)
in the rear. The wireway width is
(872.8) (1371.8) (1371.8) 32.00 inches (812.8 mm).
to total width.
5 Source 1 Top View
D
Normal
5 Lugs

5
Normal Normal
5 ATS
Breaker
Bypass
Breaker

5 Emergency Emergency
ATS Bypass
5 Load
Breaker Breaker
Lugs SP = Shipping Split.
5 Wireway
Consult factory for dimensions.
Cubicle
5 SP
B
SP
Right Side View
C
5 Front View

5 NEMA 1 Magnum Drawout Transfer Switches Magnum Bypass Isolation Drawout Transfer Switches
5 Ampere Number A B C1 D
Shipping
Weight Ampere Number A B C
Shipping
Weight
Rating of Poles Height Width Width Depth Lb (kg) Rating of Poles Height Width Depth Lb (kg)
5 4000 3 or 4 90.00 137.00 146.00 60.00 2 NEMA 1 Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch
(2286.0) (3479.8) (3708.4) (1524.0)
5 5000 3 or 4 90.00 137.00 146.00 60.00 2
4000 2 or 3 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 6900 (3133)

(2286.0) (3479.8) (3708.4) (1524.0) 4 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 7600 (3450)
5 5000 2 or 3 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 7900 (3587)
4 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 60.00 (1524.0) 8600 (3904)
5 NEMA 3R Enclosed Drawout Transfer Switch

5 4000 2 or 3
4
90.00 (2286.0)
90.00 (2286.0)
137.00 (3479.8)
137.00 (3479.8)
75.00 (1905.0)
75.00 (1905.0)
7900 (3587)
8600 (3904)

5 5000 2 or 3 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 8900 (4041)

4 90.00 (2286.0) 137.00 (3479.8) 75.00 (1905.0) 9600 (4358)
5 Notes
1 Seismic mounting adds 3.00 inches (76.2 mm) width to each side or additional 6.00 inches

5 (152.4 mm) to width.

2 Consult factory.

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-70 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Contents
Automatic Transfer Controllers
Description Page
5
Automatic Transfer Controllers 5
Product Selection Guide
Automatic Transfer Controllers Feature 5
Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71
ATC-100 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-75 5
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-80 5
Controller Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-91
ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
5
5
5
5
5
Product Selection Guide 5
Automatic Transfer Controllers Feature Selection Chart 5
5
5
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
5
Transition 5
Open transition Standard Standard Standard
Closed transition Not available Not available Standard 5
5
Timers
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) Standard Standard Standard
Time delay engine start (TDES) Standard Standard Standard
5
Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) Standard Standard Standard
Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) Standard Standard Standard 5
Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) Standard Standard Standard
Engine/Generator Exerciser 5
5
Plant exerciser (PE) with fail-safe Selectable—OFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day Selectable—OFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day Two independent exerciser modes—OFF, daily,
interval fixed run time 15 minutes interval, 0–600 minutes, no load/load 7-, 14-, 28-day interval or by calendar date
no load/load with fail-safe with fail-safe (up to 12 independent calendar dates). Test operations
include independent transfer time delays
5
Source 1 Sensing
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency protection Standard Standard Standard 5
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency protection Standard Standard Standard
Three-phase rotation sensing Not available Standard Standard 5
Three-phase voltage unbalance
Source 2 Sensing
Not available Standard Standard
5
All-phase undervoltage and underfrequency protection Standard Standard Standard 5
All-phase overvoltage and overfrequency protection Standard Standard Standard
Three-phase rotation sensing Not available Standard Standard 5
Three-phase voltage unbalance Not available Standard Standard
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-71

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Automatic Transfer Controllers Feature Selection Chart, continued

5
5
5
5 Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
Manual Controls
5 Test operators Standard Standard Standard

5
Four-position test selector switch (FPSS) Not available Not available Optional
Time delay bypass pushbutton Not available Standard Standard

5 Maintenance selector switch (MSS) Not available Optional Optional

Automatic/manual operation selector switch Not available Optional Optional
5 Automatic/manual retransfer selector switch Not available Not available Optional
Manual retransfer pushbutton Not available Optional Optional
5 Indications / Status Display

5 Source 1 connected / Source 2 connected

Source 1 available / Source 2 available
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard

5 Source 1 tripped / Source 2 tripped Standard Standard Standard

Customer Outputs
5 Source 1 / Source 2 present contacts Not available Standard—2NO and 2NC Not available
Source 1 available / Source 2 available contacts Not available Not available Standard—1 Form C
5 Load sequence Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C

5 Selective load shed

Load bank control
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Configurable—1 Form C
Configurable—1 Form C

5 Pre-transfer Not available Standard—1 Form C Configurable—1 Form C

Pre-/post-transfer Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C
5 Source 1 connected Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C

5
Source 2 connected Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C
ATS not in automatic Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C

5 General alarm Not available Standard Configurable—1 Form C

ATS in test Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C
5 Engine test aborted Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C
Cooldown in process Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C
5 Engine start contact status Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C

5 Emergency inhibit on
Switch Position Indication Contact
Not available Not available Configurable—1 Form C

5 Source 1 position indication contact Not available Standard—1 Form C Standard—1 Form C
Source 2 position indication contact Not available Standard—1 Form C Standard—1 Form C
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-72 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Automatic Transfer Controllers Feature Selection Chart, continued
5
5
5
Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
5
Customer Inputs
Go to emergency (Source 2) Not available Standard Standard—configurable input 5
5
Load shed / emergency inhibit Not available Standard Standard—configurable input
Monitor mode Not available Optional Standard—configurable input
Bypass timers Not available Not available Standard—configurable input
5
Lockout Not available Optional Standard—configurable input
Manual retransfer on/off Not available Programmed Standard—configurable input 5
Manual retransfer Not available Standard Standard—configurable input
Slave in Not available Not available Standard—configurable input 5
5
Remote engine test Not available Not available Standard—configurable input
Preferred source selection Not available Not available Standard—configurable input
Remote load test Not available Not available Standard—configurable input
5
ATS on bypass Not available Not available Standard—configurable input
Integrated Metering 5
DCT metering—load side Not available Not available Optional
Communications 5
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP
Not available
Not available
Optional
Optional
Standard
Optional
5
Transfer Mode Open Transition 5
Delayed—time delay neutral Standard—based on construction Standard—based on construction Standard—based on construction
In-phase monitoring Standard—based on construction Standard—based on construction Standard—based on construction 5
Load voltage decay Not available Not available Standard—based on construction
Transfer Mode Closed Transition
5
Closed transition Not available Not available Standard—based on construction
5
Closed transition/In-phase Not available Not available Standard—based on construction
Closed transition/In-phase/
Time delay neutral
Not available Not available Standard—based on construction 5
Closed transition/In-phase/
Load voltage delay
Not available Not available Standard—based on construction 5
Service Entrance Rating
5
Source 1, Source 2 or both, and with and without Not available Optional Optional
ground fault protection
5
Stainless Steel Cover
SS lockable cover for controller Optional Optional 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-73

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Automatic Transfer Controllers Feature Selection Chart, continued

5
5
5
5 Feature Description ATC-100 ATC-300+ ATC-900
Programming Selections
5 Time delay normal to emergency 3 seconds (fixed) 0–1800 seconds 0–9999 seconds

5
Time delay emergency to normal 5 minutes (fixed) 0–1800 seconds 0–9999 seconds
Time delay engine cooldown 5 minutes (fixed) 0–1800 seconds 0–9999 seconds

5 Time delay engine start 3 seconds (fixed) 0–120 seconds 0–120 seconds
Time delay neutral Not available 0–120 seconds 0–120 seconds or based on load
5 Time delay Source 2 fail Not available 0–6 seconds
voltage decay of 2–30% of nominal
0–6 seconds

5 Time delay voltage unbalance Not available 10–30 seconds 10–30 seconds
Voltage unbalance three-phase Not available 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) Enabled or disabled
5 Phase reversal three-phase Not available Dropout 5–20% Dropout 5–20%
Pickup (DO –2%) –3% Pickup (DO –2%) –3%
5 In-phase Not available 0 or 1 (1 = enabled)
Load sequencing Not available Not available 0–120 seconds (up to xx devices)
5 Pre-transfer signal Not available 1–120 seconds 0–120 seconds

5 Plant exerciser Selectable—OFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day

interval, fixed run time 15 minutes,
Selectable—OFF, 7-, 14-, 28-day
interval, 0–600 minutes, no load/
Two independent exerciser modes—OFF, daily,
7-, 14-, 28-day interval or by calendar date (up to
no load/load with fail-safe load with fail-safe 12 independent calendar dates). Test operations
5 include independent transfer time delays
Preferred source selection Not available Not available Source 1, Source 2 or None
5 Commitment to transfer in TDNE Not available Not available Enabled or disabled
Retransfer mode N/A automatic or manual Not available Optional Enabled or disabled
5 Auto daylight saving time adjustment Not available Not available Enabled or disabled

5 System selection Utility/generator Utility/generator or dual utility Utility/generator, dual utility,

dual generator or three source

5 Voltage Specification
System application voltage Up to 480 Vac Up to 600 Vac Up to 600 Vac

5 Voltage measurements Source 1 and 2 Source 1 and 2—VAB, VBC and VCA Source 1, 2 and load—VAB, VBC and VCA
Voltage measurement range 120–480 Vac 0–790 Vac rms 0–700 Vac rms
5 Operating power 95–145 Vac 65–145 Vac 65–160 Vac
24 Vdc (W10%)
5 Frequency Specifications
Frequency measurements Source 2 Source 1 and 2 Source 1 and 2
5 Frequency measurement range 50–60 Hz 40–70 Hz 40–70 Hz

5 Environmental Specifications
Operating temperature range –20 to +70 °C –20 to +70 °C –20 to +70 °C

5 Storage temperature range –30 to +85 °C –30 to +85 °C –30 to +85 °C

Operating humidity 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing)
5 Operating environment Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen,
hydrogen and hydrocarbons hydrogen and hydrocarbons hydrogen and hydrocarbons
5 Front Panel Indication
Mimic diagram with LED indication Unit status, Source 1 and 2 available and Unit status, Source 1 and 2 available and Unit status, Source 1 and 2 available and
5 connected (five total) connected (five total) connected (seven total)
Main display N/A LCD-based display, 2 lines, 16 characters LCD display, 4.3 inch color TFT (480x272)
5 Display language N/A English, French and Spanish English, French and Spanish

5
Communications capable N/A Modbus 485 Modbus 485 or Ethernet TCP/IP
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1 and 3R NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV resistant faceplate NEMA 1, 12, 3R and 4X UV resistant faceplate

V2-T5-74 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Contents
ATC-100 Controller
Description Page
5
Automatic Transfer Controllers 5
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71
ATC-100 Controller 5
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-76
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-76 5
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-80 5
5
Controller Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-91

5
5
5
5
ATC-100 Controller 5
Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and 5
The ATC-100 Controller is a The ATC-100 Controller The ATC-100 controller Functions
comprehensive, multifunction, provides both fixed and can be used with both the
Standard Features 5
microprocessor-based ATS jumper-selectable settings breaker-based design and
Source available indication:
5
●
controller. It is a compact, to allow for a range of the contactor-based design
self-contained, panel- applications. It operates from up to 400 A single- or three- ● Source 1
mounted device designed to all system voltages between phase. The ATC-100 Source 2
5
●

replace traditional relay and 120 and 480 Vac, single- controller is designed for ● Switch position indication:
solid-state logic panels. phase and three-phase, at 50 residential or light commercial
or 60 Hz. In addition, a period applications. If an application
● Source 1 position 5
of no control power operation is defined as an Emergency ● Source 2 position
is provided. The ATC-100
Controller monitors the
or Legally required system,
then Eaton recommends that
● Source 1 and Source 2
sensing:
5
condition of the three-phase
line-to-line voltage and
an ATC-300+ or ATC-900
controller be used. See Page
● Undervoltage/under
frequency
5
frequency of both the V2-T5-76 for ranges and
utility and generator power factory settings.
● Overvoltage/over
frequency
5
sources. It can also be set
up for single-phase operation.
● Controller settings via
jumpers located at the
5
The ATC-100 controller
5
provides the necessary rear of the unit
intelligence to ensure that ● Mimic diagram with source
available and connected
the transfer switch operates
properly through a series of LED indication 5
sensing and timing functions. ● System TEST pushbutton
● Selectable—OFF, daily, 5
7-, 14-, 28-day interval fixed
run time 15 minutes no 5
load/load with fail-safe
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-75

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Standards and Certifications

5 ● UL listed component

5 IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3,

●

61000-4-4, 61000-4-5,
61000-4-6, 61000-4-11
5 ● CISPR 11, Class B

5 FCC Part 15, Class B

●

5
5
5 Technical Data and Specifications
ATC-100 Controller Specifications
5 Description Specification

5 Input control voltage

Voltage measurements of
95 to 145 Vac 50/60 Hz
Utility VAB Generator VAB

5
Utility VBC Generator VBC
Utility VCA Generator VCA
Voltage measurement range 0 to 575 Vac rms (50/60 Hz)
5 Voltage measurement accuracy ±1% of full scale
Frequency measurements of Generator
5 Frequency measurement range 40 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency measurement accuracy ±0.3 Hz over the measurement range
5 Operating temperature range –20 ° to +70 °C (–4 ° to +158 °F)
Storage temperature range –0 ° to +85 °C (–22 ° to +185 °F)
5 Operating humidity 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing)
Operating environment Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
5 Generator start relay 5 A, 1/6 hp @ 250 Vac
5 A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum load

5 K1, K2 relays 10 A, 1–3 hp @ 250 Vac

10 A @ 30 Vdc
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12
5 UV-resistant ATC-100 faceplate

5
Adjustable Features with Range and Factory Default
5 Fixed/ Factory Default
Set Point Adjustable Description Range Breakers Contactors
5 TDES Fixed Time delay engine start 3 seconds 3 seconds 3 seconds
TDNE Jumper-selectable Time delay normal to emergency 2 or 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds
5 TDEN Fixed Time delay emergency to normal 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes
TDEC Fixed Time delay engine cool-off 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute
5 NOM FREQ Jumper-selectable Nominal frequency 50 or 60 Hz As ordered As ordered
NOM VOLTS Jumper-selectable Nominal voltage 120, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380, and 480 V As ordered As ordered
5 S1 UV DROP Fixed Utility undervoltage dropout 80% of NOMV 80% of NOMV in volts 80% of NOMV in volts
S2 UV DROP Fixed Generator undervoltage dropout 80% of NOMV 80% of NOMV in volts 80% of NOMV in volts
5 S1 UV PICK Fixed Utility undervoltage pickup 90% of NOMV 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts
S2 UV PICK Fixed Generator undervoltage pickup 90% of NOMV 90% of NOMV in volts 90% of NOMV in volts
5 S2 UF DROP Fixed Utility underfrequency dropout 90% of NOMF 90% of NOMF in hertz 90% of NOMF in hertz
S2 UF PICK Fixed Generator underfrequency pickup 95% of NOMF 95% of NOMF in hertz 95% of NOMF in hertz
5 S2 OF DROP Jumper-selectable Generator overfrequency dropout Off or 115% of NOMF (contactor) Off 115%
S2 OF PICK Jumper-selectable Generator overfrequency pickup Off or 110% of NOMF Off 110%
5 Generator test Jumper-selectable Generator test programming 7-, 14- or 28-day 7-day 7-day
Test mode Jumper-selectable Test mode Off, No Load, Load Off Off

5 TER
PHASES
Fixed
Jumper-selectable
Engine run test time
Three-phase or single-phase
15 minutes
1 or 3
15 minutes
As ordered
15 minutes
As ordered

5 TDEF
TDN
Fixed
Jumper-selectable
Time delay emergency fail timer
Time delay neutral
6 seconds
Disabled (0 seconds) or enabled (2 seconds)
6 seconds
Enabled (2 seconds)
6 seconds
Enabled (2 seconds)

V2-T5-76 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Contents
ATC-300+ Controller
Description Page
5
Automatic Transfer Controllers 5
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71
ATC-100 Controller 5
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-79 5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-79
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-80 5
5
Controller Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-91

5
5
5
5
ATC-300+ Controller 5
Product Description Features, Benefits and Functions 5
Transfer switches are equipped Standard Features Optional Features
with the high-performance ● Source available indication: ● Mimic diagram with source ● Suitable for use as service 5
ATC-300+ digital transfer ● Source 1 available and connected equipment in the standard
controller, receive rock-solid
monitoring, status reporting
● Source 2 LED indication enclosure size when used 5
● Time-stamped history log with breaker-based design
● Switch position indication:
and transfer control operation.
Its superior design and robust ● Source 1 position
● Engine TEST pushbutton
●
transfer switches
UL 1449 3rd Edition surge
5
construction make the ● Programmable plant
5
● Source 2 position protection devices
ATC-300+ the industry exerciser—OFF, daily,
● Source 1 and Source 2 7-, 14-, 28-day interval ● Integral overcurrent
benchmark for critical and
sensing:
distributed power systems.
● Undervoltage/
selectable run time
0–600 minutes no load/
protection available when
used with breaker-based 5
Application Description underfrequency design transfer switches
Eaton’s ATC-300+ Controller- ● Overvoltage/ ●
load with fail-safe
Modbus RTU ● Stainless steel cover 5
Based Automatic Transfer overfrequency communication for controller
Switch is designed to provide ● Three-phase rotation ● Control Inputs: Go To ● Manual retransfer from 5
unmatched performance, protection Emergency (Source 2), emergency to normal
reliability and versatility for ● Three-phase voltage Lockout, Monitor Mode ● Load shed/emergency 5
critical standby power unbalance inhibit
● Relay Outputs (Form C):
applications. ● Field-programmable time ● Pre-transfer, General ● HMi Remote Annunciator 5
delays Alarm Controller
● LCD-based display for ● Bypass Time Delay 5
programming, system pushbutton
diagnostic and Help ● Password protected 5
message display access
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-77

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

ATC-300+ Front Panel Display and Button Functions

5
5 Unit Status LED

5
5
Source 1, Source 2, and Load
Colored LED lights show status
of both Sources and Load.
5
5
5
LCD Display
Provides visual indication of
monitored parameters (voltage,
5 frequency), status, set points,
history, time/date. Increase/Decrease
5 Allows user to adjust values
when programming controller
set points.
5 Engine Test Button
Pressing this button
initiates an engine test.
5
5
5 Help Step Button
Pressing the Help button in any Permits user to scroll through
5 function mode will bring up display Lamp Test Enter
information and set points.
messages, explanations and

5 prompts to assist the operator.

Bypass Time Delays
Pressing the Enter and Help pushbuttons
5 simultaneously reduces the active
programmed time delay to zero to

5 simplify test procedures.

5 The following set points are programmable if the corresponding feature is programmed.

5 ATC-300+ Programming Features/Set Points 1

Set Point Set Point Units Description Range Factory Default
5 TDES Minutes: seconds Time delay engine start 0–120 seconds 0:03

5
TDNE Minutes: seconds Time delay normal to emergency 0–1800 seconds 0:00
TDEN Minutes: seconds Time delay emergency to normal 0–1800 seconds 5:00
TDEC Minutes: seconds Time delay engine cool-off 0–1800 seconds 5:00
5 TDN Minutes: seconds Time delay neutral 0–120 seconds 0:00
PLANT EXER Days Plant exerciser programming Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day or 28 day Off
5 TEST MODE — Test Mode 0, 1 or 2 (0 = no load engine test, 1 = load engine test, 2 = disabled) 0
TER Hours: minutes Engine run test time 0–600 min 5:00
5 TPRE Minutes: seconds Pre-transfer delay timer 0–120 sec 0:00
PHASES — Three-phase or single-phase 1 or 3 As ordered
5 VOLT UNBAL Volts Voltage unbalanced 0 or 1 (1 = enabled) 1
UNBAL DROP % Percent Percent for unbalanced voltage dropout 5–20% of phase voltage unbalance 20%
5 UNBAL PICK % Percent Percent for unbalanced voltage pickup Dropout minus (UNBAL DROP % –2) to 3% 10%
UNBAL DELAY Seconds Unbalanced delay timer 10–30 0:20
5 TDEF Seconds Time delay emergency fail timer 0–6 sec 6
PHASE REV — Phase reversal OFF, ABC or CBA OFF
5 Note
1 Complete list of programming selections found in IB01602009E.

5
5

V2-T5-78 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Standards and Certifications
● UL listed component ● Meets CISPR 11, Class A 5
Meets intent of Complies with FCC Part 15,
5
● ●

UL 991, 1008 Class A

Meets IEC 1000-4-2, 1000-
5
●

4-3, 1000-4-4, 1000-4-5,

1000-4-6, 1000-4-11
5
5
Technical Data and Specifications
ATC-300+ Controller Specifications
5
Description Specification
5
Input control voltage 65 to 145 Vac 50/60 Hz
Voltage measurements of Source 1 VAB
Source 1 VBC
Source 2 VAB
Source 2 VBC
5
Voltage measurement range
Source 1 VCA Source 2 VCA
0 to 790 Vac RMS (50/60 Hz)
5
Voltage measurement accuracy ±1% of full scale
5
Frequency measurements of Source 1 and Source 2
Frequency measurement range 40 Hz to 70 Hz 5
Frequency measurement accuracy ±0.3 Hz over the measurement range
Undervoltage dropout range: Breaker/switch style ATS 50 to 97% of the nominal system voltage 5
Contactor style ATS 78 to 97% of the nominal system voltage
Undervoltage pickup range: Breaker/switch style ATS (Dropout +2%) to 99% of the nominal system voltage 5
Overvoltage dropout range:
Contactor style ATS
Breaker/switch style ATS
(Dropout +2%) to 99% of the nominal system voltage
105 to 120% of the nominal system voltage
5
Contactor style ATS 105 to 110% of the nominal system voltage
5
Overvoltage pickup range: Breaker/switch style ATS 103% to (dropout –2%) of the nominal system voltage
Contactor style ATS 103% to (dropout –2%) of the nominal system voltage 5
Underfrequency dropout range: Breaker/switch style ATS 90 to 97% of the nominal system frequency
Contactor style ATS 90 to 97% of the nominal system frequency 5
Underfrequency pickup range: Breaker/switch style ATS (Dropout +1Hz) to 99% of the nominal system frequency
Contactor style ATS (Dropout +1Hz) to 99% of the nominal system frequency 5
Overfrequency dropout range: Breaker/switch style ATS
Contactor style ATS
103 to 110% of the nominal system frequency
103 to 105% of the nominal system frequency
5
Overfrequency pickup range: Breaker/switch style ATS 101% to (dropout –1 Hz) of the nominal system frequency
5
Contactor style ATS 101% to (dropout –1 Hz) of the nominal system frequency
Operating temperature range –20 °C to +70 °C (–4 °F to +158 °F) 5
Storage temperature range –30 °C to +85 °C (–22 °F to +185 °F)
Operating humidity 0 to 95% relative humidity (noncondensing) 5
Operating environment Resistant to ammonia, methane, nitrogen, hydrogen and hydrocarbons
Generator start relay 5 A, 1/6 Hp at 250 Vac 5
K1, K2, pretransfer, alarm relays
5 A at 30 Vdc with a 150W maximum Load
10 A, 1–3 hp at 250 Vac
5
K3, K4 10 A at 30 Vdc
5
Applicable testing UL recognized component
Meets UL 1008 5
Meets Intent of UL 991
Meets IEC 1000-4-2, 1000-4-3, 1000-4-4, 1000-4-5, 1000-4-6, 1000-4-11 5
Meets CISPR 11, Class A
Complies with FCC Part 15, Class A 5
Enclosure compatibility NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and NEMA 12
UV resistant ATC-300+ faceplate
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-79

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Contents
5 ATC-900 Controller
Description Page
5 Automatic Transfer Controllers
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71
5 ATC-100 Controller
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
5 ATC-900 Controller
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . V2-T5-90
5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-90

5
Controller Replacement Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-91

5
5
5
5
5 ATC-900 Controller
5 Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
Eaton’s ATC-900 brings High reliability makes the Ease of use is a major benefit ● Provide faceplate source
5 intelligence, adaptability, and ATC-900 ideal for mission- of the ATC-900 controller. status indication
enhanced supervisory and critical installations in the The simple yet powerful user ● Provide an LCD for
5 programming capabilities to
Eaton’s complete transfer
healthcare, water, industrial
and data center industries. An
interface includes many
intuitive operating features.
programming and status
readouts
5 switch product offering
including contactor-, breaker-
intelligent control architecture
allows the ATC-900 to
The color display and LED
indications provide enhanced Features and Benefits
and Magnum-based transfer address virtually any system operator visibility of transfer ● LCD screen for system
5 switches. The one standard requirements. Typical switch status and system status, programming,
model concept offers a applications include utility-to- detail. Clear operational focus system diagnostics, help,
5 variety of monitoring and
control features, selective
utility, utility-to-generator and
generator-to-generator
was achieved through design and troubleshooting
simplicity. Front arrow keys ● Event logging and
5 load shedding, remote load
testing, along with event
transfer pairs, and advanced
programming features
allow for quick screen
navigation, removal of codes
recording, 450 time
stamped events
logging/recording and provide for control of three- and abbreviations avoid
5 Modbus communications. source systems. Design potential confusion, and
● 0–600 V field programmable
system voltage flexible
With configurable monitoring flexibility allows for refined data screens provide
5 and control features and add- operations with open, in- for ease of viewing and edits.
configuration with
assignable inputs and
on accessory modules, the phase, delayed or closed
outputs
5 ATC-900 provides the
flexibility to meet current
transition platforms. Primary Functions
● Three-source ATS
The ATC-900 Automatic
control—master and slave
5 and future system needs. Transfer Switch Controller
offers these standard
controller functionality
● Selective, automatic load
5
features:
shedding
● Monitor normal and
emergency source ● Industry standard
5 voltages and frequencies communication
protocols—Modbus RTU
● Provide transfer and
5 retransfer control signals
and/or Modbus TCP/IP
communications interface
● Provide engine/generator
5 start and shutdown signals
● USB drive for uploading and
downloading of event data
● Permit user programming
5 of operational set points
● USB drive for uploading
and downloading
● Display real-time and
5
programmed set points
historical information ● Calculates positive and
● Permit system testing negative sequence voltage
5 ● Store customer and factory and current components to
established parameters in determine an unbalanced
5 nonvolatile memory or fault condition

V2-T5-80 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
ATC-900 User Interface
5
LED Mimic Diagram Unit Status Light
Source 1 and Source 2 color-coded This LED blinks green indicating that the ATC-900 is 5
LEDs provide Available and operating and providing the transfer switch control
Connected status indication. function in keeping with programmed set points.
If the LED is not lit or is on continuously, 5
a problem may be indicated.

Status Screen Help

5
The ATC-900 Main Menu screen provides
transfer switch status at a glance. Source 1,
Displays controller firmware
version and user tips. 5
Source 2 and load-metering data are
displayed as well as any active alarms. Lamp Test
Pressing the Lamp Test pushbutton lights all LEDs
5
Display and then displays ATC-900 controller information.
The ATC-900 eliminates the use of codes 5
and abbreviations for transfer switch
5
functions. Data screens are grouped for Engine Test
ease of viewing and edits. Performs an engine test using the programmed
engine run and cooldown times. This is a

Arrow Key Navigation

password-protected feature. 5
Bypass Time Delays
Right and Left Arrow Keys are used to navigate
menu options and Up and Down Arrow Keys Pressing the Enter and Help pushbuttons 5
are used to select and change set point values. simultaneously reduces the active programmed
time delay to zero to simplify test procedures.
5
ATC-900 Connections
5
5
5
5
5
Configurable Inputs
5
RS-422

5
System inputs are “wetted” contacts. System
inputs can be configured to perform a preset list DCT Module
of functions. (Note: A factory configured input
RS-232
5
cannot be reconfigured in the field if the factory
provides associated hardware.)
Modbus RTU

5
Factory Use Only Accessory I/O Port
The sensing inputs are the connection points for
monitoring Source 1, Source 2, and the Load. USB Port

5
Three-phase systems are connected to Phase A,
B and C. Single-phase systems are connected to Generator start
points Phase A and Phase B. Form-C contact. This is a latching relay utilized

5
to initiate startup and shutdown cycles of the
engine/generator set. The GENERATOR START
Factory Use Only contact is rated 5 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
■ Source 1 and Source 2 auxiliary: These inputs are
connected to the power switching devices
position indication contacts. Earth Ground 5
■ K1, K2, K3 and K4: These Form-A output contacts
Provides a connection point for the
are utilized to control the power switching
mechanism. They operate in conjunction with the
common system ground.
5
Source 1 and 2 auxiliary inputs.
5
Configurable Outputs
Four Form C dry relay contacts that can be
configured to perform a preset list of functions.

5
Control Power Inputs (Source 1 and Source 2) Contacts are rated 10 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
The control power input range is 65–145 Vac, 50/60 Hz, Note: A factory-configured output cannot be
9–36 Vdc (with optional DCT module). reconfigured in the field if the factory provides
associated hardware)

Source 1 and Source 2 Available

5
Form C dry relay contacts that indicate
Source 1 and Source 2 availability based on the
programmed voltage and frequency set points.
5
Contacts are rated 10 amperes at 250 Vac/30 Vdc.
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-81

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

ATC-900 Features
5 Features ATC-900

5 Hardware
4.3-inch color TFT LCD display ■

5 UV-resistant faceplate ■

Mimic diagram and LED status indicators ■

5 Suitable for application over a wide range of environmental conditions ■

5 Positive feedback membrane pushbuttons for application in harsh environments

Help function for detailed description of displayed message
■

5 Password protected system test pushbutton ■

Bypass time delay pushbutton ■

5 Form C engine start contact for Source 1 and Source 2 ■

■
5
S1 and S2 available Form C contacts
Self-diagnostic and system diagnostic functions with LED indication ■

5 DC power input Optional

Metering
5 True rms voltage sensing of Source 1, Source 2 and Load ■

Frequency sensing of Source 1, Source 2 and Load ■

5 Voltage unbalance and phase rotation sensing ■

5
Load current sensing Optional
Sampling at 64 samples per cycle Optional

5 Source 1 voltages (three-phase) ■

Source 2 voltages (three-phase) ■

5 Load voltages (three-phase) ■

Source 1 frequency ■
5 Source 2 frequency ■

5 Load frequency
Load currents (three-phase)
■

Optional

5 Load kW Optional
Load kvar Optional
5 Load kVA Optional
PF Optional
5 Programming

5 Programmable set points stored in nonvolatile memory ■

System monitoring with historical data storage and display ■

5 Digital set points for accurate and consistent performance ■

Password-protected access to control functions and set point programming ■

5 Four programmable control inputs ■

5
Four programmable control outputs ■

Expandable I/O modules (up to 20 I/O total) Optional

5 Automatic plant exerciser—two plant exerciser schedules, Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day, 28-day, calendar,
separate TDNE, TDEN, TDEC timers from normal operation, control input provided for remotely initiating an engine test
■

5 Communications
Modbus RTU ■

5 Modbus TCP/IP Optional

USB port for set point configuration and event-recording downloads ■
5 Event History

5
320 time-stamped events ■

2 seconds of metered data stored before and after a transfer event Optional

5
5

V2-T5-82 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
ATC-900 Programmable Set Points
The table below lists only controller features; switch features are not listed, as they are defined by switch construction. 5
Transition settings are specific to the transfer switch construction.
5
Features and Set Points
Option Factory
5
Number Description Range Default
General Settings 5
—
—
Set new password
Selected language
0000–9999
English, French or Spanish
0900
English
5
—
—
Nominal frequency
Nominal voltage
50 or 60 Hz
110–600 V
As ordered
As ordered
5
—
—
Number of phases
Number of generators
1 or 3
0, 1 or 2
As ordered
1
5
— Preferred source Source 1 or Source 2 Source 1 5
— PT ratio 2:1–500:1 As ordered
— CT ratio 200–5000 — 5
— Daylight saving time On or Off 1
— Operating mode Stand-alone/master or slave Master 5
— Phase sequence check ABC, CBA or Off Off
— Commitment to transfer in TDNE Yes or no No 5
— Manual retransfer Auto, manual or external As ordered
— Modbus address 1–247 1 5
— Modbus baud rate 0 = 9600, 1, even 9600
1 = 9600, 1, odd — 5
2 = 9600, 2, none —
3 = 9600, 1, none — 5
5
4 = 19,200, 1, even —
5 = 19,200, 1, odd —
6 = 19,200, 2, none
7 = 19,200, 1, none
—
—
5
Transition Settings
47 Closed transition
5
Closed transition On or Off On or Off As ordered 5
Closed voltage difference 1–5% 2%
Closed frequency difference 0.0–0.3 Hz 0.3 5
32f/32d Open—in-phase transition
In-phase—On or Off Disable, in-phase default to alarm,
in-phase default to open transition
As ordered 5
In-phase frequency difference 0.0–3.0 Hz 1.0
5
— Synchronization timer 1–60 minutes 5
32a/32d Open—delayed transition 5
Time delay neutral 0–600 seconds 0
Load voltage decay 2–30% of nominal voltage 6% 5
Time Delays
1a Time delay normal to emergency 0–9999 seconds 0:00 5
3a Time delay emergency to normal 0–9999 seconds 5:00
35A Time delay pre-transfer 0–120 seconds 0:01 5
35C Time delay post-transfer 0–120 seconds 0:10
2A Time delay engine 1 start 0–120 seconds (0–15,540 sec with optional DCT module) 0:03 5
5
— Time delay engine 2 start 0–120 seconds (0–15,540 sec with optional DCT module) 0:03
4A Time delay engine cool-off 0–9999 seconds 5:00
7A
—
Time delay engine fail timer
Voltage unbalance time delay
0–6 seconds
10–30 seconds
0:06
0:30
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-83

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Features and Set Points, continued

5 Option Factory
Number Description Range Default
5 Source Settings

5 26P Source 1 undervoltage dropout 70–97% of nominal 80%

Source 1 undervoltage pickup (dropout + 2%) to 99% of nominal 90%
5 5P Source 2 undervoltage dropout 70–97% of nominal 80%
Source 2 undervoltage pickup (dropout + 2%) to 99% of nominal 90%
5 26K Source 1 overvoltage dropout 105–120% of nominal (0 = disabled) 115%

5
Source 1 overvoltage pickup 103% of nominal to (dropout –2%) (0 = disabled) 105%
5K Source 2 overvoltage dropout 105–120% of nominal (0 = disabled) 115%

5 Source 2 overvoltage pickup 103% of nominal to (dropout –2%) (0 = disabled) 105%

26J Source 1 underfrequency dropout 90–97% of nominal (0 = disabled) 94%
5 Source 1 underfrequency pickup (dropout + 1 Hz) to 99% of nominal (0 = disabled) 96%
5J Source 2 underfrequency dropout 90–97% of nominal (0 = disabled) 94%
5 Source 2 underfrequency pickup (dropout + 1 Hz) to 99% of nominal (0 = disabled) 96%

5 26N Source 1 overfrequency dropout

Source 1 overfrequency pickup
103–110% (0 = disabled)
101% to (dropout –1 Hz) (0 = disabled)
106%
104%

5 5N Source 2 overfrequency dropout 103–110% (0 = disabled) 106%

Source 2 overfrequency pickup 101% to (dropout –1 Hz) (0 = disabled) 104%
5 26L Source 1 percent for unbalanced 5–20% of phase-to-phase voltage unbalance 12%
voltage dropout (0 = disabled)
5 Source 1 percent for unbalanced 3% to (dropout –2%) (0 = disabled) 10%
voltage pickup
5 5L Source 2 percent for unbalanced
voltage dropout
5–20% of phase-to-phase voltage unbalance
(0 = disabled)
12%

5 Source 2 percent for unbalanced

voltage pickup
3% to (dropout –2%) (0 = disabled) 10%

5 Engine Test/Plant Exerciser (PE1 and PE2 are independently programmable)

6B Engine test pushbutton on panel
5 Test mode No load, load transfer, disabled Load transfer
Engine run test time 0–600 minutes Load transfer
5 23M PE time delay normal 0–9999 seconds 1 minute
to emergency
5 PE time delay emergency 0–9999 seconds 1 minute
to normal
5 PE time delay engine cooldown 0–9999 seconds 5 minutes

5
PE1/PE2 test mode No load, load transfer, disabled Disabled
PE1/PE2 run time 0–600 minutes 30 minutes

5 PE1/PE2 schedule Off, daily, 7-day, 14-day, 28-day or calendar date

(up to 12 user-specified dates)
30 minutes

5 PE1/PE2 calendar date

PE1/PE2 day of week
Month: 1–12; Day: 1–31
1 Sunday, 2 Monday, 3 Tuesday, 4 Wednesday,
30 minutes
30 minutes

5 PE1/PE2 plant start time

5 Thursday, 6 Friday or 7 Saturday
HH:MM AM/PM 30 minutes

5 Accessory I/O
— Accessory I/O modules 0–4 —
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-84 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Flexible Configuration
Designed for scalability, the ● Outputs (control) Additional I/O can be added at 5
ATC-900 can be configured any time by adding an
Load sequence
5
●

for a wide variety of ● Selective load shed external I/O module. Each I/O
applications. A mix-and-match module contains four inputs
Load bank control
5
●
approach to features allows and outputs and up to four
the user to build a transfer ● Pre-/post-transfer modules can be daisy chained
switch controller that meets
the precise application needs.
● Pre-transfer to the ATC-900 controller.
5
● Post-transfer
The ATC-900 controller ● User remote control 5
includes four user ● Outputs (status/alarms)
configurable inputs and
outputs. The inputs and
● Source 1 available 5
(standard)
outputs can be assigned
functions from a predefined ● Source 2 available 5
list of options either at the (standard)
factory or in the field. ● Source 1 connected 5
● Source 2 connected
Inputs
5
●
I/O Module—The ATC-900 optional I/O
● Monitor mode
● ATS not in automatic module provides users with four
additional assignable inputs and
General alarm
5
●
● Bypass timers outputs. Up to four I/O modules can be
● ATS in test added to an ATC-900 controller
● Lockout providing a total of 20 inputs
Engine test aborted
5
● and outputs.
● Manual retransfer
On or Off ● Cooldown in process
● Manual retransfer ● Engine start contact
status
5
● Slave in
● Remote engine test
●

●
Generator 1 start status
Generator 2 start status
5
● Preferred source
selection ● Emergency inhibit on 5
● Go to emergency ● ATS on bypass
● Emergency inhibit 5
● ATS on bypass
● Go to neutral 5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-85

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

ATC-900 Metering
5
Features
5 Integrated
ATC-900
5 Feature Overview Meter
Instrumentation
5 Current, per phase ■

5 Current Demand —
Voltage, per phase (L-L) ■

5 Min. Max. Readings —

Frequency ■

5 Power

5
Real, reactive and apparent power total (W,VAR,VA) ■

Power factor, total ■

5 Energy
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh,VAR,VAh) —
ATC-900 Main Screen Shows DCT Module Attached
5 Current Values Communications
The DCT module incorporates Current Voltage Frequency RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII ■
5 a current transformer Metering Data Voltage Inputs (measurement category)
interface to the ATC-900, Metering Units Accuracy Notes
5 allowing current to be
metered along with voltage Current
Range: universal, auto-ranging up to 416 Vac L–N, 721 Vac L–L
Supported hookups: 3-element wye or delta
Input impedance: 2 m ohm/phase
5 and frequency. Combined
with the ATC-900, the DCT
IA, IB, IC Amps ±1% of
reading
Accuracy
range
Burden: 0.0022 VA/phase at 120 V
Fault withstand: meets IEEE C37.90.1
module serves as a multi- 5–100%
5 function power meter and Voltage
Current Inputs
5 A maximum
provides measurement of the
5
VAB, VBC, Volts ±1% of Applicable Burden: 0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11 A
listed electrical parameters. VCA reading to volt Pickup current: 0.1% of nominal
Readings are displayed on the range of Connections: screw terminals
5 ATC-900 controller display or
can be monitored through
34–721
Vac
Maximum input wire gauge: AWG #12/2.5 mm2
Fault withstand: 100 A/10 seconds, 300 A/3 seconds, 500 A/1 second

5 Modbus 485. Frequency

Frequency Hz ±0.2 Hz of Range is
Isolation
All inputs are isolated to 2600 Vac

5
reading 20–255 Hz
Measurement Methods
Voltage, current: true rms
5 Power and Energy
Metering Data
Power: sampling at 64 samples per cycle on all channels measured readings simultaneously
A/D conversion: 16 simultaneous 12-bit analog to digital converters

5 Power
Metering Units Accuracy Notes
Load Metering
5 Power kW ±2% of
reading
Approx.
1-second
update
5 kVA kVA ±2% of Approx.
reading 1-second
5 kvar kvar ±2% of
update
Approx.

5 reading 1-second
update

5
PF (power — 0 to ±1.00 —
factor)

5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-86 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Event Summary
In a mission-critical application, a failure to transfer to the backup 5
power system requires quick and decisive action. Eaton’s ATC-
900 controller provides users with the data required to quickly 5
identify the root cause of a backup power system failure and
minimize system downtime. This data allows the user to identify 5
a specific event and obtain the detailed event information
including a step by step breakdown of the transfer sequence.
5
Historical Data
5
5
5
Event Summary Display
5
The ATC-900 controller stores 100 transfer summaries,
350 transfer details, 100 alarms and 20 time adjustments.
5
Events include: 5
Actions of the transfer sequence
5
●

● Alarms

Historical Data Display

●

●
Changes to the set points
Changes to the time/date
5
The historical data display indicates historical and
cumulative counter values as follows:
● Resetting a historical counter 5
● Engine run test
● Source 1 available ● Time-stamping resolution of 1 second. 5
● Source 1 connected Event Details
● Source 1 engine run 5
● Source 2 available
● Source 2 connected 5
● Source 2 engine run
● Tier IV timer 5
Load energized
5
●

● Number of transfers
Historical counter resets are date and time-stamped events that 5
are captured in the event log.
5
5
Event Details Display
5
Each transfer event can be exploded to view a step by step,
time stamped, sequence of operation for a transfer event.
5
All metered values are also logged for each event and can be
viewed on the event data screen. Time stamping resolution 5
of 0.1 seconds.
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-87

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Hi-Speed Capture HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller

5 The HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller monitors and
controls up to eight transfer switches on a 7-inch LCD touch
5 screen. It is compatible with either Modbus RTU or Modbus
TCP/IP protocols. A basic mimic bus for each transfer switch
5 displays source availability, source connected and preferred
source. Users can drill down to metered source values and
5 event history for each transfer switch. All control features are
password-protected and include engine test, transfer to
5 emergency (peak shaving), manual retransfer and bypass
time delays.

5
5
5 High Speed Capture Display, Pre and Post Event

5 The ATC-900 stores metered data updated on a continuous

20 millisecond basis for specific events. The data is captured
5 2 seconds before and 2 seconds after the event (except for a
power failure, which is 4 seconds before). Oscillographic data
5 for 10 events is stored in the controller and may be downloaded
over USB or displayed graphically.

5 ● Events include:
● Source unavailability actions that initiate a transfer sequence
5 (undervoltage, overvoltage, etc.)
● Successful transfers (at the point of breaker/
5 ●
contactor closure)
Unsuccessful transfers (at the point of breaker/contactor
5 failure to close or open) HMi Remote Annunciator and Controller

Industry Standard Communication Protocol USB Programming Port

5 Every ATC-900 controller includes a standard Modbus RTU Every ATC-900 transfer switch includes a front panel,
communications interface with an option to upgrade to NEMA 4X rated USB port for use in configuring set points or
5 Modbus TCP/IP. downloading event data to a USB flash drive. To reduce the time
spent on site for commissioning, set points can be configured at
5 The ATC-900 is also compatible with Eaton’s Power Xpert
Gateway for web-based monitoring, Modbus TCP/IP,
a PC using the ATC-900 configuration software and saved to a
USB flash drive to be uploaded to one or multiple controllers. Set
5
SNMP, or BACnet/IP. The Power Xpert Gateway can be points are also easily copied from one controller to another.
used to consolidate data from up to 64 devices, including
communications ready transfer switch controllers, trip Downloading event capture data provides the user the ability to
5 units and meters, as well as other Eaton devices. Versions more thoroughly analyze high-speed capture data using a PC, or
data can be emailed to Eaton’s Technical Support Team when
of the Power Xpert Gateway include email event notification
5 sand data-logging functionality. off site troubleshooting support is required.

Eaton ATC-900 Setpoint Editor (EASE)

5 The Setpoint Editor Software program allows the user to create,
5 edit and save set point configuration files for the ATC-900
controller using a laptop. Software can be downloaded from
the Eaton website (www.eaton.com/ATS).
5
5
5
5
5 USB Programming Port

5
5

V2-T5-88 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Power Xpert Architecture with ATC-900
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Special Applications
5
Three-Source ATS Control Load Management 5
The ATC-900 Master/Slave controller functionality provides The ATC-900 includes several features to enhance the user’s
the user with the ability to use two independent transfer ability to manage load while on the alternate source. 5
switches in three-source systems consisting of a utility
Integrated load metering: provides metering data that allows
5
●
and two generator sources. In a three-source system, the
Master ATS controls the engine starting and stopping of the user to monitor energy utilization and manage system
loading
the Slave ATS.
● Selective load shedding: selectively drop non-essential loads 5
In the event of a Source 1 power failure, the Master ATS when a user-defined kW level is reached. The transfer switch
engine start relay closes signaling the Slave ATS to start both remains on generator 5
generators. (Note: The Slave ATS requires continuous power ● Load shed to neutral (where ATS construction allows):
using either the DCT Module for a DC power input or a UPS
input.) The Master ATS handles all transfer time delays between
provides the ability to load shed to a neutral position from 5
a generator source
5
the utility to generator transfer. If the preferred generator does
not start within the programmed time delay, the Slave ATC-900
● Pre-/post-transfer signals: provides the ability to stop select
will initiate a transfer to the non-preferred generator. If “None loads during the transfer process
Preferred” is selected, then both generators will start and the ● Load bank disable output: disengages a load bank if utility 5
Slave ATS will transfer to the first generator source available. power is lost during an engine test
The ATC-900 will sense the load is connected to a good source
and shut down the second generator.
Three-Source Transfer Switch Arrangement 5
Slave ATS 5
S1 S2
5
Gen 1 Gen 2
Slave
Master ATS

Utility
S1 S2 5
Gen Start (Signal to Start Gen)
5
Load 5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-89

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions

5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

5
Technical Specifications
ATC-900
Parameter Specification

5 Control
power
120 Vac (50/60 Hz) (operating range 65–160 Vac)
or 24 Vdc (±10%) with optional DCT module
5.00 (127.0)
3.63 (92.1)

5 Power
consumption
18 VA

5 Environmental
conditions

5 Operating –4 to +158 °F (–20 to +70 °C) Top View

temperature 6.72 (170.7) 0.50 2.10
(12.7) (53.4)

5
Operating Up to 90% relative humidity (noncondensing)
humidity

5
Enclosure NEMA 12 (standard mounting)
compatibility NEMA 4/4X (mounted with gasket between
panel and device faceplate)
5 NEMA 3R (outdoor)
UV resistant ATC-900 faceplate

5 System voltage
application
120–600 Vac (50/60 Hz) (single- or three-phase)

10.25 9.31

5
Voltage Source 1, Source 2 and Load (VAB, VBC, VCA for (260.4) (236.5)
measurements three-phase system)
Voltage 0–700 Vac
5 measurement
range

5 Voltage
measurement
±1% of reading

5
accuracy
Frequency Source 1 and Source 2
measurements Front View Side View
5 Frequency 40–80 Hz
measurement
5 range Additional Information
Frequency ±0.1 Hz Instruction bulletin: IB01602088E
5 measurement
accuracy Web-based demo: www.eaton.com/ats
5 Applicable
testing
UL recognized component
2009 IBC, 2010 CBC and OSHPD certified
in ATS assemblies
5 Complies with UL 991 environmental tests
Complies with IEC 61000-4-2, 61000-4-3, 61000-4-4,

5
61000-4-5 and 61000-4-6
Complies with CISPR 11, Class A
Complies with FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
5 CSA C22.2 No. 178-1978 (reaffirmed 1992)
conformance

5 CE mark European standards conformance

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-90 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
Contents
Controller Replacement Guide
Description Page
5
Automatic Transfer Controllers 5
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-71
ATC-100 Controller 5
ATC-300+ Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-77
ATC-900 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-80 5
Controller Replacement Guide
ATC-100 Controller Replacement Kits . . . . . V2-T5-91 5
5
ATC-300 Controller Replacement Kits . . . . . V2-T5-92
ATC-300+ Controller Replacement Kits . . . . V2-T5-92
ATC-600 and ATC-800 Controller
Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-93 5
5
5
5
Controller Replacement Guide 5
Product Description 5
Automatic Transfer Switch
Controller Replacement
It is important to note that the
same controller type can be
ATC-100 Controller Replacement Kits 5
The ATC-100 controller is
Eaton automatic transfer
switches use several different
used on different switch
types and the factory
primarily used on residential
and light commercial
5
controller types. These programmed firmware/ applications up to 400 A.
automatic transfer controllers options will vary depending This controller may be used 5
(ATCs) may be ordered as on the switch type. Thus it is with either contactor-based
replacement for current very important to know the or molded case switch 5
manufacturer’s existing original switch type in order designs. The ATC-100 is only
automatic transfer switches.
If vintage analog controller or
to select the correct
controller replacement kit.
used on open transition type
transfers. Replacement kits
5
If there is a question on
controller parts are needed,
then a separate renewal part which kit to select, then
are ordered by style number
(see table below). 5
data list needs to be providing the factory with the ATC-100
referenced. The intent of this original general order number 5
section is to address current and/or the 15-character
controllers as listed in the catalog number will eliminate
any doubts regarding the
ATC-100 Replacement Kits 5
table below. Controller Replacement
correct kit selection. Transfer Switch Type Type Style Number 5
Power Frame–Based Design

Automatic Transfer Controllers ATC-100 controller is not available — — 5

5
Controller Order via Style Order via Replacement Kit Molded Case–Based Design
Type Number Only Style Number and Feature List 1 Open transition ATC-100 8160A00G23
ATC-100 See ATC-100 Replacement Kits
table on the right
Contactor-Based Design
5
2-position open transition ATC-100 8160A00G24
ATC-300
ATC-300+
Superseded by ATC-300+
See ATC-300 Replacement Kits,
2-position closed transition — — 5
3-position open transition — —
5
Page V2-T5-92
ATC-600 See ATC-600/800 Replacement Kits, 3-position closed transition — —
Page V2-T5-93
ATC-800 See ATC-600/800 Replacement Kits,
Note
1 Feature list required upon order entry.
5
Page V2-T5-93
ATC-900 ATC-900 Controller Replacement 5
Guide, Page V2-T5-95
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-91

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

ATC-300 Controller Replacement Kits ATC-300+ Controller Replacement Kits

5 The ATC-300 controller has were not available on the The ATC-300+ controller The controllers have
been in use for many years ATC-300. If these features was first used in 2012 for a style number (typically
5 and was applied on molded were not previously supplied molded case switch and open 6D32360Gxx) printed on
case switch units up to with the ATC-300, then the transition contactor-based the rear. This style number
5 1000 A and contactor-based end user does not have to (2-position and 3-position) is for factory use only and
automatic transfer switches use these additional features. designs. It is also used as will NOT identify which
5 up to 1200 A. In 2012, the
ATC-300 was replaced by the
In addition, the ATC-300+
includes Modbus RTU
the replacement kit for
legacy ATC-300 controllers.
controller kit is needed.
If there is trouble identifying
5 ATC-300+ controller. An ATC-
300+ replacement kit is used
communication. It is critical to verify the
application that needs a the correct controller type,
for replacement of older The ATC-300 and ATC-300+ replacement kit. The ATC- pressing the Help button
5 ATC-300s. When ordering have identical size and
mounting dimensions. The
300+ is NOT used on closed will provide a hardware/
firmware revision level,
the replacement kit, it is very transition designs.
5 important to identify that the
existing application is either a
J8 pin is now an 8-pin
connector versus a 4-pin The ATC-300+ controller will
serial number and feature
code that an Eaton factory
connector on the legacy ship from the factory with the representative can use for
5 molded case switch design
or a contactor 2-position or ATC-300. J8 pins 5–6 and lockout feature enabled. If not identification.
3-position design. 6–8 are the connections required, then a jumper wire
5 for Emergency Inhibit and should be installed at the
The ATC-300+ has two Manual Retransfer. The lockout input.
5 features—Emergency Inhibit
and Manual Retransfer—that
replacement kit includes
the 8-pin connector.
5
5 ATC-300/300+ Replacement Kits
Transfer Controller Replacement

5
Switch Type Type Style Number 1
Power Frame–Based Design

5 ATC-300+ controller is not available — —

ATC-300+ PCB Style
Number
Molded Case–Based Design
5 Open transition ATC-300+ 8160A00G100 2 6D32360Gxx
Contactor-Based Design Note: This style number will not
5 2-position open transition ATC-300+ 8160A00G104
identify the replacement kit. The
ATS catalog number is required
5 3-position open transition ATC-300+ 8160A00G108 to identify the replacement kit.
The 15-character catalog number
Examples: Replacement Kit Style Number Selection is on the ATS nameplate located
5 Example 1— Example 2—
on interior door of the ATS.

Molded Case–Based Design Contactor-Based Design

5 Review 5th and 6th character Review 5th and 6th character
in the ATS 15-character to determine if the ATS is a ATC-300+ Rear View
5 catalog number. two-position or a three-
position, and then select
If the 5th and 6th character ATC-300/300+ Connectors
5
●
replacement kit accordingly.
is FD, KD, LD, MD, NB, Connector Designation Replacement Style Number
then select 816000G100 Note: C2 is two-position and C3
5 ● Example: or C5 is a three-position. J1 or J2 (4-pin) 1268C07H31

ATV3KDA30300XSU J7 (4-pin) 1268C07H31

5 Example:
●
implies 8160A00G100 J8 (8-pin) 67A2590H21
ATC3C2X30200XSU
implies 8160A00G104 J4 (10-pin) 67A2590H28
5 ● Example: J5 (14-pin) 67A2590H29
ATC3C3X30400XSU
5 implies 8160A00G108
Notes
1 The replacement style number 8160A00Gxx will include the printed circuit board style
● Example:
5
number (6D32360Gxx) shown on back of the controller.
ATC3C5X30600XSU 2 Identify if lockout feature 16 is required.

implies 8160A00G108
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-92 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
ATC-600 and ATC-800 Controller Replacement Kits
The ATC-600 is used on See the table below for the 5
molded case switch and replacement kit style numbers
power circuit breaker-based for automatic transfer 5
designs up to 1000 A. It is switches with ATC-600 or
also used on open transition ATC-800 controllers. Because 5
Magnum power switch and each controller was
power circuit breaker designs
up to 5000 A.
specifically supplied with the
standard features and any
5
5
order-specific optional
The ATC-800 has been used features, there is no practical Board Level Style Number 2D78580GXX
on closed transition Magnum way to create a replacement
power switch and power
circuit breaker–based designs
kit style number for each 5
variation of the features
up to 5000 A. The ATC-800 is
currently being used on open
supplied. Thus, when ordering
the replacement kit
5
and closed transition
contactor-based designs up
8160A00GXX, the job-specific
controller features must be ATC-600/800 Replacement Kits
5
to 1200 A. specified. Order-specific
Legacy automatic transfer features need to be included Transfer Switch Type
Controller
Type
Replacement
Style Number
5
switches may have used with the order entry.
what is referred to as See Feature List Steps
Power Frame–Based Design 5
IQ Controllers. Controller Open transition ATC-600 8160A00G03 1
table on Page V2-T5-94 for
replacements for those units identifying the features to be Open transition ATC-600 8160A00G41 2 5
can be ordered as ATC-600 supplied on the order entry. Closed transition ATC-800 8160A00G05 1
for open transition and
ATC-800 for closed transition. On the back of the Closed transition ATC-800 8160A00G42 2
5
In some cases, both the
ATC-800/600 controllers
is a style number similar
Molded Case–Based Design
5
ATC-600 and ATC-800 Open transition ATC-600 8160A00G03 1
to a 2D7858GXX. This style
controllers have been
used on medium voltage
number only identifies the Open transition ATC-600 8160A00G41 2 5
basic control board that is Contactor-Based Design
transfer switches. included in the replacement 2-position open transition ATC-800 8160A00G43 2 5
When ordering the kit per the table on this page.
5
The replacement kit style 2-position closed transition ATC-800 8160A00G43 2
replacement kit, always
provide the original GO# of number listed on this page 3-position open transition ATC-800 8160A00G43 2
must be used to order the
the ATS to correctly identify
the features supplied with the replacement kit.
3-position closed transition ATC-800 8160A00G43 2
5
controller. This feature set
will then be used to program Type
Replacement
Style Number
5
the replacement controller.
ATC-600/800 Connectors
5
J4 19-pin 67A2590H25
J5 22-pin 67A2590H26 5
Source 1 4-pin 1268C07H31
Source 2 4-pin 1268C07H31 5
Load 4-pin
J7 4-pin
1268C07H31
1268C07H31
5
Notes 5
1 Kit includes one J4 (19-pin), one J5 (22-pin), four 4-pin connectors (S1, S2, Load, J7 Power)

and pins.
2 Kit does not include any connectors/pins.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-93

 5.7 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers

Feature List Feature List Steps

5 The replacement controller The existing controller also Step Action
needs to match the features has a catalog number feature
5 originally supplied. The easiest code that defines what
A.1 Identify replacement style number from table on Page V2-T5-93.

way to supply this list is to features are included. A.2 Identify original general order (GO) number. 12
5 provide the original order Pressing the Help Lamp A.3 Order style number with GO information in the order notes. 3 If the original GO number
number from the original Test button will show this is hard to identify or is unavailable, then one of the following steps below can be taken.

5 shipment. The ATS product

line maintains a database with
code on a scrolling display. B.1 Provide the 9-digit feature code from the ATC-800 or ATC-600 controller. Feature code
is viewable from ATC-600 or ATC-800 readout screen by pressing the Help button.
If this information is not Controller must be able to be powered up to view this feature code. On older controllers,
5 the original feature list. The
general order (GO) number is supplied on order entry, then the feature code may be 7 or 8 characters. Feature code example (3f-e3-31-032).
on the ATS nameplate located the order will be placed on C.1 If the above information is not available, then provide a detailed listing of features
5 on the inside of the door. In manufacturing hold until the
information is supplied.
to be supplied with the controller. The following questions must be answered.
addition, it is very helpful to Switch Type
5 also supply the 15-digit ATS
catalog number that can be
Molded case switch
Power switch, open transition
5 found on the ATS nameplate.
Power switch, closed transition

5 Contactor open transition, 2-position

Contactor open transition, 3-position

5 Contactor closed transition, 2-position

Contactor closed transition, 2-position
5 Medium voltage WLI or breaker
Medium voltage open transition
5 Medium voltage closed transition
Feature code example (3f-e3-31-032)
5
Features
5C source 2 O–F monitoring

5 Press Help Lamp Test button to

initiate the Display Screen Readout
5E/G source 2 O–V monitoring
Bypass TDEN/TDNE

5 10 preferred source
16 overcurrent trip
5 23 plant exerciser
Source 1 O–V monitoring
5 26D go to emergency

5 Source 1 U–F monitoring

Source 1 O–F monitoring

5 29J manual retransfer

32A/B delayed transition
5 32A TDN time delay neutral
32B time delay load voltage
5 32C in-phase/TDNLV
32D in-phase/TDN
5 35 pretransfer signal

5 36 emergency inhibit
37 service entrance

5 45 remote sequencing
46 PT ratio
5 47C closed/in-phase transition
47D closed transition only
5 47E closed/in-phase/TDN

5
47F closed/TDNLV

Notes

5 1 Not replacement order number.

2 If ATS is mounted in Eaton motor control center or Eaton switchboard, the ATS order number

must be supplied, not the overall gear General Order number. This ATS order number is
5 located on the ATS label.
3 If the original GO number is not supplied on order entry, then the order will be placed on

5 manufacturing hold until the feature list is supplied.

V2-T5-94 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Automatic Transfer Controllers
5.7
ATC-900 Controller Replacement Guide ATC-900 (Top Left and Right Side Views)
The ATC-900 controller is 5
used on any of Eaton’s
automatic transfer switches. 5
It can be used on contactor-
based, molded case switch- 5
based, and Magnum power
switch-based designs. In
addition, the ATC-900 is used
5
5
on either open or closed
transition type switches.
The ATC-900 controller is
provided as a replacement 5
controller for existing designs.
The selection guide below
provides the different style
5
number replacement kits.
5
5
ATC-900 Replacement Kit Selector Table ATC-900 Mating Connectors (Plugs) 5
Number of Connector Designation Number of Pins Connector Part Number
Switch Type Positions Transition Style Number Kit
J1 3 1268C07H41 5
Contactor-based 3 Open 8160A90G01
5
J2 3 1268C07H41
Contactor-based 2 Open 8160A90G07
J3 3 1268C07H41
Contactor-based 3 Closed 8160A90G13
Bypass contactor-based 3 Open 8160A90G19
J4 19 67A2590H25
5
J5 3 66A8190H01
Bypass contactor-based 3 Closed 8160A90G25
J6 12 67A2590H32 5
Molded case–based 3 Open 8160A90G31
J7 4 1268C07H31
Power frame–based 3 Open 8160A90G37
J8 USB M22-USB-SA 5
Power frame–based 3 Closed 8160A90G43

In addition, the ATC-900 Refer to the controller field

J9
J11
8
4
66A8190H04
66A8190H02
5
controller can be used to
retrofit and upgrade existing
upgrade selection below.
The upgrade kit includes the
J12 4 66A8190H02 5
automatic transfer switches ATC-900 controller and the J13 4 66A8190H02
using either an ATC-600 or an wire harness adapter kit. J14 n/a From DCT Module 5
ATC-800 controller. J15 6 66A8190H03
DCT Module
5
Retrofit/Upgrade Selector Kit for ATC-600 or ATC-800 J18 2 8160A18G98
5
Switch Type Style Number Kit I/O Module

Contactor-based 8160A91G01
J1 120 Vac Power 4 1268C07H31 5
J2 Inputs and GND 10 67A2590H28
Molded case–based
Power frame–based
8160A91G01
8160A91G01
J3 Communications 4 66A8190H02 5
5
J4 Outputs Form C 12 67A2590H32
Bypass contactor-based 8160A91G04
Note
The connectors to the ATC- 900 can be ordered separately; however, connector kit
style number 8160A92G01 can be ordered that includes connectors for J1, J2, J3, J7, 5
J4, J6, J9, J11, J12 and J15.
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-95

 5.8 Transfer Switches
HMi Remote Annunciator Controller

Contents
5 HMi Remote Annunciator Controller
Description Page
5 HMi Remote Annunciator Controller
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-97
5 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-98
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-99
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5 HMi Remote Annunciator Controller
5 Product Description Features and Benefits
Eaton’s HMi Remote One Product, Multiple Design Highlights ● Source and load metering
5 Annunciator Controller (RAC) Advantages ● Utilizes Eaton’s HMi of voltage, current,
series provides users with The HMi RAC has a multi- (human-machine interface) frequency, power, power
5 the ability to remotely
monitor and control multiple
view option that allows for
remote management of
series factor, voltage unbalance
● Display type: 7-inch TFT, ● Mimic bus graphic
5 transfer switches from one
intuitive, touch screen user
multiple transfer switches
from an intuitive touch screen
800 x 600, LED backlight indicating status of source
available, preferred and
interface.
● Touch screen
interface where users can: connection
5 ● View the status of up to
● NEMA 4X/IP65 ● Source health indication
Remote Management, ● 24 Vdc operating voltage
5 Date and time stamped
●
Enhanced Safety eight transfer switches on (AC power supply optional)
Tightening arc flash a single overview screen event and alarm history
● 85 dB multi-tone-frequency
5 Programmable transfer
●
regulations and requirements ● View and program transfer alarm buzzer
for personal protective switch controller set switch designations
● Operating temperature:
equipment are driving more points, control inputs and Password protection
5
●
32–122 °F (0–50 °C)
and more end users toward relay outputs ● Serial (Modbus RTU) and
the use of remote monitoring
● Storage temperature: –4 to
● Start and stop a generator Ethernet (Modbus TCP/IP)
5 and control devices. Eaton’s engine test
+140 °F (–20 to +60 °C)
communication
HMi Remote Annunciator ● 10% ~ 90% RH [0 ~ 40C],
● Initiate a transfer to the ● Compatible with Eaton’s
5 Controller offers a simple and
cost-effective means of
alternate source
10% ~ 55% RH [41 ~ 50C]
ATC-900 and ATC-300+ 1
● 3 V lithium battery backup automatic transfer switch
● Bypass a time delay
5 providing transfer switch
monitoring and control.
countdown
●
(CR2032 x 1)
Serial interconnect module
controllers
Designed to meet today’s ● Initiate a manual retransfer
5 most common specifications, ● View and silence alarms
(included)
Standards and Certifications
including the City of Chicago ● Perform basic
5 CE and UL safety approval
●
Electrical Code, the HMi RAC troubleshooting
communicates with Eaton’s ● Analyze metering and
5 automatic transfer switch
controller via serial Modbus
trend data of source and Note
1 A reduced set of features are available
load
5 or Ethernet (with Gateway when managing an ATC-300+ controller.
device).
● Monitor source Please consult the applicable HMi RAC
synchronization during in- Instruction Booklet (IB) for details.
5 phase or closed transition

5
5
5

V2-T5-96 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
HMi Remote Annunciator Controller
5.8
Technical Data and Specifications
5
ATS Controller View Screen ATS Controller View Screen
● Provides status indication 5
of a single ATS including
limited control 5
functionality
● Time delay countdown 5
● Source available, preferred
and connected indication 5
● Metering and health vitals
for Source 1, Source 2 and
Load
5
● Manual controls for Go To
Emergency, Bypass
5
Timers, Start Engine Test
and Manual Retransfer 5
System setup
5
●

● Event history
●

●
Alarm status
Real-time trend data
5
graphic for Source 1,
Source 2 and Load 5
Source synchronization
5
●

status

5
● Mimic bus diagram
● Silence audible alarm
Not in Automatic,
5
●

Go To Emergency and
Emergency Inhibit status
indication 5
● Return to overview screen
5
ATS Overview Screen Event History Screen Manual Controls Source Health
● Abbreviated status Event messages: ● Start Engine Test: ● Voltage, frequency, phase 5
indication for up to eight Password protected loss and voltage unbalance
5
● Preferred Source Avail.
transfer switches control to start and abort are compared to
● Overvoltage
● Single touch provides an engine test. The engine programmed set points
Undervoltage
5
●
quick and easy access test will run according to and provide real-time
to controller view screen
● Overfrequency the controller-programmed status indication of
for a single ATS ● Underfrequency set points (with or without
load)
“source health”
Bar graphs dynamically
5
● Plant Exerciser ●

● Engine Test ● Bypass Timers: Provides

ability to override
change color when source
is not within programmed 5
● Remote Engine Test
programmed time delays set point tolerances
● Voltage Unbalance ● Go To Emergency: ● Trend icon provides single- 5
● Phase Reversal Password protected touch access to source
● Go to Emergency control to initiate a transfer metering waveform data 5
● Monitor Mode to the alternate source.
● More available w/ATC-900 Failsafe returns ATS to the 5
normal source if the

Remote Set Point Editing

Alarm messages:
In Lockout
alternate source fails 5
● ● Manual Retransfer:
● Password protected
editing of transfer switch
● Engine Test Aborted Allows operator to
manually initiate a
5
● Failed to Sync (Freq.)
controller set points retransfer from the
● System parameters
● Failed to Sync (Phase) alternate source to the 5
● S1 Mech Fault normal source
Time delays
5
●
● S2 Mech Fault
● Dropouts and pickups ● More available w/ATC-900
●

●
Engine test and exerciser
Programmable I/O
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-97

 5.8 Transfer Switches
HMi Remote Annunciator Controller

Wiring Diagrams
5
Serial Diagram
5 Front View
Note: To remotely manage multiple controller RS-485
Modbus
types (ATC-900 and ATC-300+), a dedicated
5 HMi RAC is needed for each controller type.
A single HMi RAC cannot manage a mix of
RS-485
termination SW1
J10
ATC-900 and ATC-300+ controller types. ATC-300+ Shield (bare mesh/foil)

5
SHD 4-
Blue w/white stripe
COM 3-
White w/orange stripe
A– 2-
Orange w/white stripe
B+ 1-

5
RS-485 Use BELDEN 3106A

5
Modbus (or equal) for
Modbus RS-485
RS-485
SW1
POWER termination J12

5 ATC-900
SHLD
COM
Shield (bare mesh/foil)
Blue w/white stripe
White w/orange stripe
A(–)

5
Orange w/white stripe
AC power supply (optional—used when external 24 Vdc not available) B(+)

HMi Remote Annunciator Control (RAC)

touch screen/display ELC-PSO2-24V ELC-PS02

5
ELC-PSO2-0V

LINE L
COM N 120 Vac
Rear View GND
GND
HMI–(+) 24 V

5
HMI–(–) 0V

ELC-PS02

+
Host
5
–
GND

Slave DC 24 V
White w/orange stripe

5 System
COM2

Blue w/white stripe

1 10

3 8
2 9

5 6
4 7

Orange w/white stripe

LAN
5 Interconnect module
(included with HMi RAC)
COM1

secure module to COM2

5 Audio using integral set screws.

Note: HMi RAC is shipped loose and not installed in the ATS enclosure.
5 Communication and power wiring must be run to the HMi RAC.

5 Ethernet Diagram
RS-485

5 Modbus
RS-485
termination SW1
Front view
J10

5 ATC-300+ SHD
COM
4-
3-
Shield (bare mesh/foil)
Blue w/white stripe
White w/orange stripe AC power supply (optional—used when external 24 Vdc not available)
A– 2-

5
Orange w/white stripe
B+ 1-
ELC-PS02 ELC-PSO2-24V
ELC-PSO2-0V
RS-485
5
LINE L
Modbus COM N 120 Vac
GND
Use BELDEN 3106A GND
RS-485 (or equal) for HMI–(+) 24 V

termination SW1 HMI–(–) 0V

Modbus RS-485

5
J12
ELC-PS02

Shield (bare mesh/foil)

ATC-900 SHLD
Blue w/white stripe
COM Connect as POWER
White w/orange stripe

5
A(–) shown using AC power supply (optional—used when external 24 Vdc not available)
Orange w/white stripe
B(+)
gateway (PXG900
or ELC-CAENET) ELC-PS02
ELC-PSO2-24V
ELC-PSO2-0V

5
device. Gateway
not provided LINE
COM
L
N 120VAC HMi Remote Annunciator Control (RAC)
GND
with HMi RAC. GND
HMI–(+) 24 V touch screen/display

5
HMI–(–) 0V

Note: To remotely manage multiple ELC-CAENET

controller types (ATC-900 and ELC-PS02

ATC-300+), a dedicated HMi RAC Connect

LAN

5
is needed for each controller type. to HMi Rear view
A single HMi RAC cannot manage PXG gateway
+
a mix of ATC-900 and ATC-300+ – COM1 INCOM
SHLD
CMN

controller types. SG

5
B(+)
A(–)

LAN
D1
D2

24 Vdc +
24 Vdc Host –
GND

5 Blue w/white stripe Slave dc 24 V

Orange w/white stripe
System
COM2

White w/orange stripe

5 Note: Diagram shows direct Ethernet

connection. The gateway may be CAT5e
LAN
placed anywhere on an existing

5 network to communicate to the RAC.

COM1

Audio

5 Note: HMi RAC is shipped loose and not installed in the ATS enclosure.
Communication and power wiring must be run to the HMi RAC.

V2-T5-98 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
HMi Remote Annunciator Controller
5.8
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5
HMi RAC Dimensions 5
Quick and easy panel-mount installation using four fasteners (included). For panel 5 mm thick or less.
6.79
5
0.063 (1.6)~0.24 (6.1)

5
(172.5)
7.24
(183.9)

5
5
5.21
5.67
(144.0)
(132.3)
5
5
5
5
0.63 (16.0)
5
Panel-Mount 0.80 (20.4)
5
5
Fastener

5
0.64
(16.3)

5
5
AC Power Supply (Optional) HMi RAC Enclosure (Optional)
● Can be used when external 24 Vdc ● ANSI 61 grey finish 5
is not available to power HMi RAC ● Keyhole slots in the flat cover permit
● 100–240 Vac, 50/60 Hz input removal without extracting screws 5
● DIN rail mount ● Grounding provision
● Rear mounting holes and knockout 5
provisions on sides
0.12
● UL 50, Type 1 5
2.17 0.52 2.36
(3.0)
(55.0) (13.3) (60.0) 12.00
(304.8) 5
5
3.54
(90.0)
4.00
(101.6)
5
5
3.94
(100.0)
12.00
5
5
(304.8)
0.12
(3.0)

5
1.28
(32.5) 5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-99

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Transfer Switch Features—Standard and Optional

Contents
5 Description Page
5 Transfer Switch Features—Standard and Optional
Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer
5 Switch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-100
Molded Case–Based—Automatic Transfer
5 Switch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-108
Power Frame–Based—Automatic Transfer
5 Switch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-112
Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-116
5 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V2-T5-124

5
5
5
5
5 Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features

5 Feature
Open Transition
RLC1 ATC1 ATC3 ATC9 NTCE

5
Number Description C2 C2 C2 C3 C5 C2 C3 C5 C2 C3
Timers

5 1
1A
Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) fixed 2 or 15 seconds
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
S
—
S
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes — — — — — S S S — —
5 2 Time delay engine start (TDES) fixed 3 seconds S S — — — — — — — —
2A Adjustable 0–120 seconds — — S S S S S S — —
5 3 Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) fixed 5 minutes S S — — — — — — — —
3A Adjustable 0–1800 seconds — — S S S — — — — —
5 3B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes — — — — — S S S — —
4 Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) fixed 5 minutes S S — — — — — — — —
5 4A
4B
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
Adjustable 0–9999 minutes
—
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
—
—
—

5 Emergency (S2) Source Sensing

5H Phase reversal protection — — S S S S S S — —
5 5J
5K
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
S
—
S
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
—
5L All phase voltage unbalance — — S S S S S S — —
5 5M
5N
All phase voltage phase loss
All phase overfrequency
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
—

5 System or Engine Test

6B Engine test pushbutton S S S S S S S S — —
5 6C
6D
Remote engine test input
Maintained 2-position test switch
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
—
—
—
—
6H Maintained 4-position test switch — — — — — O O O — —
5 7 Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) fixed 6 seconds S S — — — — — — — —
7A Adjustable 0–6 seconds — — S S S S S S — —
5 Pushbutton Bypass
8C Bypass TDEN — — S S S S S S — —
5 8D Bypass TDNE — — S S S S S S — —
8E Bypass TDNE/TDEN (input) — — — — — C C C — —

5 Maintenance Selector Switch

9B Electrical operator isolator switch — — O O O O O O — —
5 S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5

V2-T5-100 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
RLC1
C2
ATC1
C2
ATC3
C2 C3 C5
ATC9
C2 C3 C5
NTCE
C2 C3
5
Preferred Source Selector
5
Preferred source selector (programmed) — — — — — S S S — —
10A
10C
Preferred source selector input
Preferred source selector with selector switch
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
—
—
—
— 5
10B Utility to utility or utility to generator — — — — — S S S — —
10D Generator to generator — — — — — S S S — — 5
Indicating Lights/LEDs
12C Normal (S1) source connected S S S S S S S S S S 5
12D Emergency (S2) source connected S S S S S S S S S S
12G
12H
Normal (S1) source available
Emergency (S2) source available
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S 5
12L Normal (S1) source tripped (requires feature 16) — — — — — — O O — —
12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires feature 16) — — — — — — O O — — 5
Source Available Contacts
14C Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C — — O O O O O O O O 5
14D Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C — — O O O O O O O O
14E
14F
Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C
Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
— 5
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C — S S S S O O O S S
14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C — S S S S O O O S S 5
Position Contacts
15E Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C — S S S S S S S S S 5
15F Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C — S S S S S S S S S
15G
15H
Normal (S1) source position 3 Form C
Emergency (S2) source position 3 Form C
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O 5
15R Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT) — — — — — C C C — —
15S Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT) — — — — — C C C — — 5
Integral Overcurrent Protection
16N Normal (S1) switch only — — — — — — — — — — 5
16E Emergency (S2) switch only — — — — — — — — — —
16B
16S
Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches
Service equipment/overcurrent protection normal (S1) and emergency (S2)
—
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
Breaker with O/C Trip
17N Normal (S1) Breaker Only with 100% load rating — — — O O O O O O O
5
Metering
(Specify normal (S1), emergency (S2) or load side for 18A thru E)
5
18
18A
Integrated load metering (DCT module)
IQ 250/260
—
—
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
O
—
O 5
18B PX4000/6000/8000 — — — — — — — — — —
18D
18E
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
5
5
18J Integrated metering (DCT module—load side only) — — — — — O O O — —
21A Non-standard terminals — — — — — — — — — —
22
22C
Ground bus
Special ground bar—contact factory
—
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
5
22D 16 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil — — — — — — — O — —
Plant Exerciser 5
23A Selectable—disabled/7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes
load/no load, with fail-safe
S S — — — — — — — —
5
23K Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0–600 minutes — — S S S — — — — —

23L
load/no load, with fail-safe
24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable plant exerciser — — O O O — — — — —
5
23M Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-, 365-day interval, 0–600 minutes — — — — — S S S — —
load/no load, with fail-safe 5
5
S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-101

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued

5 Open Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
RLC1
C2
ATC1
C2
ATC3
C2 C3 C5
ATC9
C2 C3 C5
NTCE
C2 C3

5 Normal (S1) Source Sensing

26D Go to emergency (S2) input — — S S S C C C — —
5 26E
26H
Go to emergency (S2) input with selector switch 1
Phase reversal protection
—
—
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
O
O
S
O
S
—
—
—
—
26J All phase undervoltage/underfrequency — — S S S S S S — —
5 26K
26L
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
All phase voltage unbalance
—
—
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
—
26M All phase voltage phase loss — — — — — S S S — —
5 26P All phase undervoltage S S — — — — — — — —
Alternative Transfer Modes of Operation
5 29G Selector switch for auto or non-auto operation 1 — — O O O O O O — —
29J Manual (pushbutton) transfer E to N; automatic N to E 1 — — O O O O O O — —
5 29L
29M
Manual retransfer on/off input
Manual retransfer on/off input with selector switch 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
—
—
—
—
29K Manual retransfer input — — — — — C C C — —
5 Open Transfer Operation Modes

5
32A Time delay neutral adjustable 0–120 seconds (delayed transition) — — — S — — C C — —
32B Load voltage decay adjustable 2–30% nominal voltage — — — — — — C C — —
32C In-phase transition defaults to load voltage decay — — — — — — C C — —
5 32D
32E
In-phase transition defaults to time delay neutral
Delay transition timer adjustable 3–60 seconds
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
32F In-phase transition S S S — — S — — — —
5 32G Time delay neutral fixed 0 or 2 seconds (delayed transition) — — — — — — — — — —
Logic Extender Cable (Open Enclosures Only)
5 34A 48 inches (1219 mm) — — — — — — — — — —
34C 96 inches (2438 mm) — O O O O — — — O O
5 34E
34F
144 inches (3658 mm)
100 inches (2540 mm) (fixed mount only)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

5 35A
35B
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1 Form C
Pre-/post-transfer signal
—
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
—
—
—
—

5
36 Load shed from emergency (S2 inhibit) — — — S S C C C — —
36A Load shed—S2 inhibit with keyed switch (INPUT) — — — — — O O O — —
37 Go to “isolated” position (not SE rated) — — — — — C C C — —
5 Suitable for Use as Service Equipment Requires 16B, N or S

5
37A Without ground fault protection — — O O O O O O O O
37B With ground fault protection required at 1000 A or more if the electrical service — — O O O O O O O O
is a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150 V to ground but not exceeding
5 600 V phase to phase
Stainless Steel Device Covers
5 38A SS cover for device plate or SE disconnect — — O O O O O O O O
38B SS cover for controller — O O O O O O O — —
5 Space Heater with Thermostat
41A 100 watts — O O O O O O O O O
5 41E 375 watts — — — — — — — — — —
42 IBC/CBC seismic qualified S S S S S S S S S S
5 Load Management Contacts

5
45A–K Load sequencing contacts (1) — — — — — C C — — —
45L Selective load shed (assignable to multiple out put contacts) — — — — — C C C — —

5 S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

Note

5 1 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-102 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
RLC1
C2
ATC1
C2
ATC3
C2 C3 C5
ATC9
C2 C3 C5
NTCE
C2 C3
5
Communications
5
48D PXG400 gateway (includes Modbus) — — O O O O O O — —
48F
48F
Modbus—MPONI module (PONI not required with ATC-300+)
Modbus communication—no PONI required
—
—
—
—
O
S
O
S
O
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
—
—
— 5
48G Modbus TCP/IP gateway — — — — — O O O — —
48P
48RAC
Power supply for remote annunciator
Remote annunciator with control (includes Modbus)
—
—
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
5
48MRAC Remote annunciator with control multi-switch (includes Modbus) — — O O O — — — — —
48U USB port — — — — — S S S — — 5
49A Sensing isolation transformer Magnum — — — — — O O O — —
49B
49C
Sensing isolation transformer
Multi-tap voltage transformer (non AG only)
—
—
—
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
—
S
—
S
5
5
49C Multi-tap voltage transformer (option only on fixed) — — — — — — — — — —
TVSS up to 480 V (Connected to Normal)
51D1
51F1
50 kA—CVX
100 kA—CVX
—
—
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
5
Surge Protection Device with 12 ft Cable (on Normal)
5
51S1 50 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — — — — —
51S2
51S3
80 kA—SPD 1
100 kA—SPD 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
51S4 120 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — — — — —
51S5
51S6
160 kA—SPD 1
200 kA—SPD 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
51S7 250 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — — — — —
51S8
51S9
300 kA—SPD 1
400 kA—SPD 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
52B
52C
24 V generator battery power
24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
54B Upgrade to 316 stainless steel — — O O O O O O O O
5
60 Control power transformer (240/120 V single-phase and 208 V only) — O O — — — — — — —
61A UPS device — — — — — — — — — — 5
61B UPS 120 Vac terminal block input — — — — — — — — — —
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact — — — O O C C C — — 5
Monitoring Outputs
81A General alarm indication contact — — — — — C C C — — 5
81B ATS not in automatic — — — — — C C C — —
81C
81D
ATS in test
Engine test aborted
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
—
—
—
—
5
81E Cooldown in process — — — — — C C C — —
81F
81G
Engine start contact status
Emergency inhibit on
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
—
—
—
—
5
81GL
81H
Emergency inhibit on with white indicating light 2
ATS on bypass
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
O
C
O
C
O
C
—
—
—
— 5
5
Inputs
81J Lockout — — — — — C C C — —
81K Monitor mode — — — — — C C C — —
81L Remote load test — — — — — C C C — — 5
Three Source ATS Control (Master/Slave)
90A Master control output — — — — — C C C — — 5
90B Slave input — — — — — C C C — —

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
Notes
1 Add feature package B or C (e.g., 51S4B).
5
5
B: LED indication and audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard)
C: B and surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
2 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.

5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-103

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
BIC3
(up to 400 A)
BIC3
(600–1600 A)
BIC9
(up to 400 A)
BIC9
(600–1600 A)
CBC9
(up to 400 A)
CBC9
(600–1600 A)
CTC9
C3

5 Timers
1A Adjustable 0–1800 seconds S S — — — — —
5 1B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes — — S S S S S
2A Adjustable 0–120 seconds S S S S S S S

5 3A
3B
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
Adjustable 0–9999 minutes
S
—
S
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S

5 4A
4B
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
Adjustable 0–9999 minutes
S
—
S
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S

5 Emergency (S2) Source Sensing

5H Phase reversal protection S S S S S S S
5 5J
5K
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
5L All phase voltage unbalance — — O O O O O
5 5M
5N
All phase voltage phase loss
All phase overfrequency
—
—
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

5 System or Engine Test

6B Engine test pushbutton S S S S S S S
5 6C
6D
Remote engine test input
Maintained 2-position test switch
—
—
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
6H Maintained 4-position test switch — — O O O O O
5 7A Adjustable 0–6 seconds S S S S S S S

5
Pushbutton Bypass
8C Bypass TDEN S S S S S S S

5
8D Bypass TDNE S S S S S S S
8E Bypass TDNE/TDEN (input) — — C C C C C
Maintenance Selector Switch
5 9B Electrical operator isolator switch O O O O O O O

5 Preferred Source Selector

Preferred source selector (programmed) — — S S S S S

5
10A Preferred source selector input — — C C C C C
10C Preferred source selector with selector switch — — O O O O O
10B Utility to utility or utility to generator — — S S S S S
5 10D Generator to generator — — S S S S S
Indicating Lights/LEDs
5 12C
12D
Normal (S1) source connected
Emergency (S2) source connected
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

5 12G
12H
Normal (S1) source available
Emergency (S2) source available
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
12L Normal (S1) source tripped (requires feature 16) — — O O O O O
5 12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires feature 16) — — O O O O O
Source Available Contacts
5 14C
14D
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C O O O O O O O
Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C O O O O O O O

5 14E
14F
Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C
Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C
—
—
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C S S O O O O O
5 14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C S S O O O O O

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-104 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
BIC3
(up to 400 A)
BIC3
(600–1600 A)
BIC9
(up to 400 A)
BIC9
(600–1600 A)
CBC9
(up to 400 A)
CBC9
(600–1600 A)
CTC9
C3
5
Position Contacts
5
15E Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S S S S S S S
15F
15G
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C
Normal (S1) source position 3 Form C
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O 5
15H Emergency (S2) source position 3 Form C O O O O O O O
15R
15S
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
Integral Overcurrent Protection
5
16N Normal (S1) switch only — — — — — — —
16E
16B
Emergency (S2) switch only
Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
16S Service equipment/overcurrent protection normal (S1) and emergency (S2) — — — — — — —
Metering 5
(Specify normal (S1), emergency (S2) or load side for 18A thru E)
18 Integrated load metering (DCT module) — — O O O O O 5
18A IQ 250/260 O O O O O O O
18B
18D
PX4000/6000/8000
IQ 130/140/150
—
O
O
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O 5
18E PXM2250/2260/2270 O O O O O O O
18J Integrated metering (DCT module—load side only) — — O O O O O
5
20A Rear bus connections — — — — — — —
21A Non-standard terminals (optional in IES for centers) — — — — — — — 5
22 Ground bus S S — — — — —
22C
22D
Special ground bar—contact factory
16 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
—
—
—
5
Plant Exerciser 5
23A Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes — — — — — — —

23K
load/no load, with fail-safe
Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0–600 minutes S S — — — — —
5
load/no load, with fail-safe
23L
23M
24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable plant exerciser
Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-, 365-day interval, 0–600 minutes
O
—
O
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
5
load/no load, with fail-safe
Normal (S1) Source Sensing
5
26D
26E
Go to emergency (S2) input
Go to emergency (S2) input with selector switch 1
S
—
S
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
5
26H Phase reversal protection S S S S S S S
26J
26K
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
5
26L
26L
All phase voltage unbalance and phase loss
All phase voltage unbalance
—
S
—
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S 5
5
Alternative Transfer Modes of Operation
29D Dual ATS bypass S S S S S S —
29G Selector switch for auto or non-auto operation 1 O O O O O O O
29J Manual (pushbutton) transfer E to N; automatic N to E 1 O O O O O O O 5
29L Manual retransfer on/off input — — C C C C C
29M
29K
Manual retransfer on/off input with selector switch 1
Manual retransfer input
—
—
—
—
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C 5
S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable
5
Note
1 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-105

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
BIC3
(up to 400 A)
BIC3
(600–1600 A)
BIC9
(up to 400 A)
BIC9
(600–1600 A)
CBC9
(up to 400 A)
CBC9
(600–1600 A)
CTC9
C3

5 Open Transfer Operation Modes

32A Time delay neutral adjustable 0–120 seconds (delayed transition) S S C C — — —
5 32B
32C
Load voltage decay adjustable 2–30% nominal voltage
In-phase transition defaults to load voltage decay
—
—
—
—
C
—
C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
32D In-phase transition defaults to time delay neutral — — — — — — —
5 32E
32F
Delay transition timer adjustable 3–60 seconds
In-phase transition
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
32G Time delay neutral fixed 0 or 2 seconds (delayed transition) — — — — — — —
5 Load Control

5 35A
35B
Pre-transfer signal contacts 1 Form C
Pre-/post-transfer signal
S
—
S
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

5 36
36A
Load shed from emergency (S2 inhibit)
Load shed—S2 inhibit with keyed switch (INPUT)
S
—
S
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O
C
O

5
37 Go to “isolated” position (not SE rated) — — C C C C C
Suitable for Use as Service Equipment Requires 16B, N or S

5 37A
37B
Without ground fault protection
With ground fault protection required at 1000 A or more if the
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than
5 150 V to ground but not exceeding 600 V phase to phase
Stainless Steel Device Covers
5 38A SS cover for device plate or SE disconnect O O O O O O O
38B SS cover for controller O O O O O O O
5 Space Heater with Thermostat
41A 100 watts O O O O O O O
5 41E 375 watts — — — O — O —
42 IBC/CBC seismic qualified S S S S S S S
5 Load Management Contacts

5 45A–K
45L
Load sequencing contacts (1)
Selective load shed (assignable to multiple out put contacts)
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C

5
Closed Transition Operational Modes (User Must Specify)
47C Closed/in-phase transition default to load voltage decay — — — — — — —

5
47D Closed transition — — — — C C C
47E Closed/in-phase transition default to time delay neutral — — — — — — —
47F Closed transition load voltage decay — — — — C C C
5 47G
47H
Closed transition time delay neutral
Parallel limit timer
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
—
C
—
C
—

5 Communications
48A INCOM—IPONI module — — — — — — —

5
48D PXG400 gateway (includes Modbus) O O O O O O O
48F Modbus—MPONI module (PONI not required with ATC-300+) O O — — — — —
48F Modbus communication—no PONI required S S S S S S S
5 48G
48P
Modbus TCP/IP gateway
Power supply for remote annunciator
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
48RAC Remote annunciator with control (includes Modbus) O O O O O O O
5 48MRAC
48R
Remote annunciator with control multi-switch (includes Modbus)
Remote annunciator
—
—
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
48U USB port — — — — — — —
5 49A Sensing isolation transformer Magnum — — O O O O O
49B Sensing isolation transformer — — O O O O O
5 49C
49C
Multi-tap voltage transformer (non AG only)
Multi-tap voltage transformer (option only on fixed)
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
S
S
—

5 S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-106 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Contactor-Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
BIC3
(up to 400 A)
BIC3
(600–1600 A)
BIC9
(up to 400 A)
BIC9
(600–1600 A)
CBC9
(up to 400 A)
CBC9
(600–1600 A)
CTC9
C3
5
TVSS up to 480 V (Connected to Normal)
5
51D1 50 kA—CVX O — O — O — O
51F1 100 kA—CVX
Surge Protection Device with 12 ft Cable (on Normal)
O — O — O — O
5
51S1
51S2
50 kA—SPD 1
80 kA—SPD 1
—
—
O
O
—
—
O
O
—
—
O
O
—
—
5
5
51S3 100 kA—SPD 1 — O — O — O —
51S4 120 kA—SPD 1 — O — O — O —
51S5 160 kA—SPD 1 — O — O — O —
51S6
51S7
200 kA—SPD 1
250 kA—SPD 1
—
—
O
—
—
—
O
—
—
—
O
—
—
— 5
51S8 300 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — —
51S9 400 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — — 5
52B 24 V generator battery power — — — — — — —
52C 24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries) — — — — — — —
5
54A Front access cabinet — — — — — — —
54B Upgrade to 316 stainless steel O O O O O O —
5
59A Silver-plated bus S S — S — S —
59B
61A
Tin-plated bus
UPS device
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
5
61B UPS 120 Vac terminal block input S S — — — — —
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact S S C C C C C
Monitoring Outputs
5
81A General alarm indication contact — — C C C C C
81B
81C
ATS not in automatic
ATS in test
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C 5
81D Engine test aborted — — C C C C C
81E
81F
Cooldown in process
Engine start contact status
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
81G Emergency inhibit on — — C C C C C
81GL Emergency inhibit on with white indicating light 2 — — O O O O O 5
81H ATS on bypass — — C C C C C
Inputs 5
81J Lockout — — C C C C C
81K
81L
Monitor mode
Remote load test
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
Three Source ATS Control (Master/Slave)
5
90A Master control output — — C C C C C
90B Slave input — — C C C C C
5
S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable
Notes 5
1 Add feature package B or C (e.g., 51S4B).

B: LED indication and audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard)
C: B and surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
5
5
2 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured

by the user.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-107

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Molded Case–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
ATH1
ATV1
ATH3
ATV3
ATH9
ATV9
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
MBHE

5 Timers
1 Time delay normal to emergency (TDNE) fixed 2 or 15 seconds S — — — — —
5 1A
1B
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
Adjustable 0–9999 minutes
—
—
S
—
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—

5 2
2A
Time delay engine start (TDES) fixed 3 seconds
Adjustable 0–120 seconds
S
—
—
S
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
3 Time delay emergency to normal (TDEN) fixed 5 minutes S S — — — —
3A Adjustable 0–1800 seconds — — — — — —
3B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes — — S — — —
5 4 Time delay engine cooldown (TDEC) fixed 5 minutes S — — — — —
4A Adjustable 0–1800 seconds — S — — — —

5 4B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes

Emergency (S2) Source Sensing
— — S — — —

5 5H
5J
Phase reversal protection
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
—
S
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
5K All phase overvoltage/overfrequency — S S — — —
5L All phase voltage unbalance — — O — — —
5L All phase voltage phase loss — — S — — —
5 5N All phase overfrequency
System or Engine Test
S — S — — —

5 6B
6C
Engine test pushbutton
Remote engine test input
S
—
S
—
S
C
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
6D Maintained 2-position test switch — — O — — —
6H Maintained 4-position test switch — — O — — —
7 Time delay emergency fail (TDEF) fixed 6 seconds S — — — — —
5 7A Adjustable 0–6 seconds — S S — — —
Pushbutton Bypass
5 8C Bypass TDEN — S S — — —
8D Bypass TDNE — S S — — —
5 8E Bypass TDNE/TDEN (input) — — C — — —
Maintenance Selector Switch
5 9B Electrical operator isolator switch — O O — — —
Preferred Source Selector
5 Preferred source selector (programmed) — — S — — —
10A Preferred source selector input — — C — — —
5 10C
10B
Preferred source selector with selector switch
Utility to utility or utility to generator
—
—
—
—
O
S
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
10D Generator to generator — — S — — —
Indicating Lights/LEDs

5 12C
12D
Normal (S1) source connected
Emergency (S2) source connected
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
—
—
S
S
12G Normal (S1) source available S S S S — —
5 12H
12L
Emergency (S2) source available
Normal (S1) source tripped (requires feature 16)
S
—
S
O
S
O
S
O
—
—
—
—

5
12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires feature 16) — O O O — —
Source Available Contacts

5 14C
14D
Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C
Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
14E Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C — — S — — —
5 14F
14G
Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C
Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C
—
S
—
S
S
O
—
O
—
—
—
—

5
14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C S S O O — —

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-108 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Molded Case–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
ATH1
ATV1
ATH3
ATV3
ATH9
ATV9
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
MBHE
5
Position Contacts
5
15E Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S S S — — —
15F
15G
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C
Normal (S1) source position 3 Form C
S
O
S
O
S
O
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
15H Emergency (S2) source position 3 Form C O O O — — —
15R
15S
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
—
—
—
—
C
C
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
Integral Overcurrent Protection
5
16N Normal (S1) switch only — O O O O —
16E
16B
Emergency (S2) switch only
Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
— 5
Metering
(Specify normal (S1), emergency (S2) or load side for 18A thru E) 5
18 Integrated load metering (DCT module) — — — — — —
18A IQ 250/260 O O O O — — 5
18B PX4000/6000/8000 — — — — — —
18D
18E
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
— 5
18J Integrated metering (DCT module—load side only) — — O O — —
20A Rear bus connections — O O O O — 5
21A Non-standard terminals (optional in IES for centers) O O O O O O
22 Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral — — O — — —
5
Plant Exerciser
5
23A Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, fixed 15 minutes S — — — — —

23K
load/no load, with fail-safe
Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-day interval, 0–600 minutes — S — — — — 5
load/no load, with fail-safe
23L
23M
24-hour, 7-day, 365-day programmable plant exerciser
Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-, 365-day interval, 0–600 minutes
—
—
O
—
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
load/no load, with fail-safe
Normal (S1) Source Sensing 5
26D
26E
Go to emergency (S2) input
Go to emergency (S2) input with selector switch 1
—
—
S
—
C
O
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
26H Phase reversal protection — S S — — —
26J
26K
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
—
—
S
S
S
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
26L All phase voltage unbalance and phase loss — — O — — —
26L
26M
All phase voltage unbalance
Allows operation with generator with utility sensing
—
O
S
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
26P (available only through a field installed kit) (not in IES)
Alternative Transfer Modes of Operation
S — — — — —
5
29G
29J
Selector switch for auto or non-auto operation 1
Manual (pushbutton) transfer E to N; automatic N to E 1
—
—
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
29L Manual retransfer on/off input — — C — — —
29M Manual retransfer on/off input with selector switch 1 — — O — — — 5
29K Manual retransfer input — — C — — —

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable 5

5
Note
1 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.

5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-109

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Molded Case–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
ATH1
ATV1
ATH3
ATV3
ATH9
ATV9
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
MBHE

5 Open Transfer Operation Modes

32A Time delay neutral adjustable 0–120 seconds (delayed transition) — S C — — —
5 32B
32C
Load voltage decay adjustable 2–30% nominal voltage
In-phase transition defaults to load voltage decay
—
—
—
—
C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
32D In-phase transition defaults to time delay neutral — — — — — —
5 32E
32F
Delay transition timer adjustable 3–60 seconds
In-phase transition
—
—
—
—
—
—
S
—
—
—
—
—
32G Time delay neutral fixed 0 or 2 seconds (delayed transition) S — — — — —
5 Logic Extender Cable (Open Enclosures Only)

5 34A
34C
48 inches (1219 mm)
96 inches (2438 mm)
—
—
—
—
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
34E 144 inches (3658 mm) — — O O — —
5 34F 100 inches (2540 mm) (fixed mount only) — — — — — —
35A Pre-transfer signal contacts 1 Form C — S C — — —
5 35B Pre-/post-transfer signal — — C — — —
36 Load shed from emergency (S2 inhibit) — O C — — —
5 36A Load shed—S2 inhibit with keyed switch (INPUT) — — O — — —
37 Go to “isolated” position (not SE rated) — — C — — —

5 Suitable for Use as Service Equipment Requires 16B, N or S

37A Without ground fault protection — O O O — —
5 37B With ground fault protection required at 1000 A or more if the
electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150 V to ground but
— O O O — —

5
not exceeding 600 V phase to phase
Stainless Steel Device Covers

5 38A
38B
SS cover for device plate or SE disconnect
SS cover for controller
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—

5 Distribution Panel (For 240/120 V Only)

39A 225 A with (2) 200 A feeders — O — — — —

5 39B
39C
300 A with (3) 200 A feeders
400 A with (4) 200 A feeders
—
—
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
Space Heater with Thermostat
41A 100 watts O O O O O O

5 42 IBC/CBC seismic qualified S S S S S S

Load Management Contacts
5 45A–K
45L
Load sequencing contacts (1)
Selective load shed (assignable to multiple out put contacts)
—
—
—
—
C
C
—
—
—
—
—
—

5 Communications
48D PXG400 gateway (includes Modbus) — O O — — —
5 48F
48G
Modbus communication—no PONI required
Modbus TCP/IP gateway
—
—
—
—
S
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
48P Power supply for remote annunciator — O O — — —
5 48RAC
48MRAC
Remote annunciator with control (includes Modbus)
Remote annunciator with control multi-switch (includes Modbus)
—
—
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

5 48U
49B
USB port
Sensing isolation transformer
—
—
—
O
S
O
—
—
—
—
—
—

5
49C Multi-tap voltage transformer 1 S S S S S —
49C Multi-tap voltage transformer (option only on fixed) — — — — — —

5 S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

Note

5 1 On dedicated voltage 240 V or 208 V, multi-tap transformer is not included as standard.

5
5
5
5

V2-T5-110 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Molded Case–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
ATH1
ATV1
ATH3
ATV3
ATH9
ATV9
NTHE
NTVE
MTHX
MTVX
MBHE
5
TVSS up to 480 V (Connected to Normal)
5
51D1 50 kA—CVX — O O O O —
51F1 100 kA—CVX
Surge Protection Device with 12 ft Cable (on Normal)
— O O O O —
5
51S1
51S2
50 kA—SPD 1
80 kA—SPD 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
5
51S3 100 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — —
51S4 120 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — —
51S5 160 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — —
51S6
51S7
200 kA—SPD 1
250 kA—SPD 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
51S8 300 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — —
51S9 400 kA—SPD 1 — — — — — — 5
52B 24 V generator battery power — — — — — —
52C 24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries) — — — — — —
5
54A Front access cabinet — — — — — —
54B Upgrade to 316 stainless steel — O O O O —
5
55B Source swap (normal—bottom / emergency—top) — — — — — —
60 Control power transformer (240/120 V single-phase and 208 V only) O O — — — — 5
61A UPS device — — — — — —
61B UPS 120 Vac terminal block input — — — — — — 5
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact — O C — — —
Monitoring Outputs 5
81A General alarm indication contact — — C — — —
81B ATS not in automatic — — C — — — 5
81C ATS in test — — C — — —
81D
81E
Engine test aborted
Cooldown in process
—
—
—
—
C
C
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
81F Engine start contact status — — C — — —
81G
81GL
Emergency inhibit on
Emergency inhibit on with white indicating light 2
—
—
—
—
C
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
81H ATS on bypass — — C — — —
Inputs 5
81J
81K
Lockout
Monitor mode
—
—
—
—
C
C
—
—
—
—
—
— 5
81L Remote load test — — C — — —
Three Source ATS Control (Master/Slave) 5
5
90A Master control output — — C — — —
90B Slave input — — C — — —

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

Notes
5
1 Add feature package B or C (e.g., 51S4B).

B: LED indication and audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard) 5
C: B and surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
2 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-111

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Power Frame–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
ATV9
MG
NTVE
MG
BIV9
MG
CTV9
MG
CBV9
MG

5 Timers
1B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes S — S S S
5 2A
3A
Adjustable 0–120 seconds
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
S
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S
—
3B Adjustable 0–9999 minutes S — S S S
5 4A
4B
Adjustable 0–1800 seconds
Adjustable 0–9999 minutes
—
S
—
—
—
S
—
S
—
S

5 Emergency (S2) Source Sensing

5H Phase reversal protection S — S S S
5 5J
5K
All phase undervoltage/underfrequency
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
S
S
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
5L All phase voltage unbalance O — O O O
5 5L
5N
All phase voltage phase loss
All phase overfrequency
S
S
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S

5 System or Engine Test

6B Engine test pushbutton S — S S S
5 6C
6D
Remote engine test input
Maintained 2-position test switch
C
O
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
6H Maintained 4-position test switch O — O O O
5 7A Adjustable 0–6 seconds S — S S S

5
Pushbutton Bypass
8C Bypass TDEN S — S S S

5
8D Bypass TDNE S — S S S
8E Bypass TDNE/TDEN (input) C — C C C
Maintenance Selector Switch
5 9B Electrical operator isolator switch O — O O O

5 Preferred Source Selector

Preferred source selector (programmed) S — S S S

5 10A
10C
Preferred source selector input
Preferred source selector with selector switch
C
O
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
10B Utility to utility or utility to generator S S S S S
5 10D Generator to generator S S S S S
Indicating Lights/LEDs
5 12C
12D
Normal (S1) source connected
Emergency (S2) source connected
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

5 12G
12H
Normal (S1) source available
Emergency (S2) source available
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
12L Normal (S1) source tripped (requires feature 16) O O O O O
5 12M Emergency (S2) source tripped (requires feature 16) O O O O O
Source Available Contacts
5 14C Normal (S1) source available 4 Form C O O O O O
14D Emergency (S2) source available 4 Form C O O O O O

5 14E
14F
Normal (S1) source available 1 Form C
Emergency (S2) source available 1 Form C
S
S
—
—
S
S
S
S
S
S
14G Normal (S1) source available 2 Form C O — O O O
5 14H Emergency (S2) source available 2 Form C O — O O O

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-112 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Power Frame–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
ATV9
MG
NTVE
MG
BIV9
MG
CTV9
MG
CBV9
MG
5
Position Contacts
5
15E Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C S — S S S
15F
15G
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C
Normal (S1) source position 3 Form C
S
O
—
—
S
O
S
O
S
O 5
15H Emergency (S2) source position 3 Form C O — O O O
15R
15S
Normal (S1) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
Emergency (S2) source position 1 Form C (relay OUTPUT)
C
C
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
Integral Overcurrent Protection
5
16N Normal (S1) switch only O O O O O
16E
16B
Emergency (S2) switch only
Normal (S1) and emergency (S2) switches
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O 5
Metering
(Specify normal (S1), emergency (S2) or load side for 18A thru E) 5
18 Integrated load metering (DCT module) O — O O O
18A IQ 250/260 O O O O O 5
18B PX4000/6000/8000 — O — — —
18D
18E
IQ 130/140/150
PXM2250/2260/2270
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
— 5
18J Integrated metering (DCT module—load side only) O O O O O
20A Rear bus connections O O O O O 5
21A Non-standard terminals (optional in IES for centers) O O O O O
22 Ground bus with provisions to attach to neutral O S O O O
5
22A 18 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil S O S S S
22B
22C
30 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil
Special ground bar—contact factory
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
5
5
22D 16 conductor ground bus 500 or 750 kcmil — — — — —
Plant Exerciser
23M Selectable—disabled 7-, 14-, 28-, 365-day interval, 0–600 minutes
load/no load, with fail-safe
S — S S S
5
Normal (S1) Source Sensing
5
26D Go to emergency (S2) input C — C C C
26E
26H
Go to emergency (S2) input with selector switch 1
Phase reversal protection
O
S
—
—
O
S
O
S
O
S 5
26J All phase undervoltage/underfrequency S — S S S
26K
26L
All phase overvoltage/overfrequency
All phase voltage unbalance and phase loss
S
O
—
—
S
O
S
O
S
O
5
26L All phase voltage unbalance S — S S S
Alternative Transfer Modes of Operation 5
29D
29G
Dual ATS bypass
Selector switch for auto or non-auto operation 1
—
O
—
—
—
O
—
O
—
O 5
29J Manual (pushbutton) transfer E to N; automatic N to E 1 O — O O O
29L
29M
Manual retransfer on/off input
Manual retransfer on/off input with selector switch 1
C
O
—
—
C
O
C
O
C
O
5
29K Manual retransfer input C — C C C

S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
Note
1 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-113

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Power Frame–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued

5 Open Transition Closed Transition

5 Feature
Number Description
ATV9
MG
NTVE
MG
BIV9
MG
CTV9
MG
CBV9
MG

5 Open Transfer Operation Modes

32A Time delay neutral adjustable 0–120 seconds (delayed transition) C — C C C
5 32B
32C
Load voltage decay adjustable 2–30% nominal voltage
In-phase transition defaults to load voltage decay
C
C
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
32D In-phase transition defaults to time delay neutral C — C C C
5 Logic Extender Cable (Open Enclosures Only)

5
34F 100 inches (2540 mm) (fixed mount only) O O — — —
35A Pre-transfer signal contacts 1 Form C C — C C C
35B Pre-/post-transfer signal C — C C C
5 36 Load shed from emergency (S2 inhibit) C — C C C
36A Load shed—S2 inhibit with keyed switch (INPUT) O — O O O
5 37 Go to “isolated” position (not SE rated) C — C C C

5 Suitable for Use as Service Equipment Requires 16B, N or S

37A Without ground fault protection O O O O O

5
37B With ground fault protection required at 1000 A or more if the O O O O O
electrical service is a solidly grounded wye system of more than 150 V to ground but
not exceeding 600 V phase to phase
5 Stainless Steel Device Covers
38A SS cover for device plate or SE disconnect O O O O O
5 38B SS cover for controller O O O O O
Space Heater with Thermostat
5 41A 100 watts — — — — —
41E 375 watts O O O O O
5 42 IBC/CBC seismic qualified S S S S S
Load Management Contacts
5 45A–K Load sequencing contacts (1) C — C C C
45L Selective load shed (assignable to multiple out put contacts) C — C C C
5 Closed Transition Operational Modes (User Must Specify)

5 47C
47D
Closed/in-phase transition default to load voltage decay
Closed transition
—
—
—
—
—
—
C
C
C
C
47E Closed/in-phase transition default to time delay neutral — — — C C
5 47F
47G
Closed transition load voltage decay
Closed transition time delay neutral
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
47H Parallel limit timer — — — S S
5 Communications

5 48D
48G
PXG400 gateway (includes Modbus)
Modbus TCP/IP gateway
O
O
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
48P Power supply for remote annunciator O — O O O
5 48RAC
48MRAC
Remote annunciator with control (includes Modbus)
Remote annunciator with control multi-switch (includes Modbus)
O
O
—
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
48U USB port S — S S S
5 49A Sensing isolation transformer Magnum O — O O O
49B Sensing isolation transformer O — O O O
5 49C Multi-tap voltage transformer (non AG only) S S S S S

5
S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable

5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-114 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
Power Frame–Based—Automatic Transfer Switch Features, continued
Open Transition Closed Transition
5
Feature
Number Description
ATV9
MG
NTVE
MG
BIV9
MG
CTV9
MG
CBV9
MG
5
Surge Protection Device with 12 ft Cable (on Normal)
5
51S1 50 kA—SPD 1 O O O O O
51S2
51S3
80 kA—SPD 1
100 kA—SPD 1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O 5
51S4 120 kA—SPD 1 O O O O O
51S5
51S6
160 kA—SPD 1
200 kA—SPD 1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
5
51S7 250 kA—SPD 1 O O O O O
51S8 300 kA—SPD 1 O O O O O 5
51S9 400 kA—SPD 1 O O O O O
52B
52C
24 V generator battery power
24 V onboard power supply (charger and batteries)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
5
54A
54B
Front access cabinet
Upgrade to 316 stainless steel
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
O
—
5
55B Source swap (normal—bottom / emergency—top) O O O O O
5
57A Magnum breaker lift device (1) NEMA 1 only O O — — —
57B Magnum breaker lift device bypass (2) NEMA 1 only — — O O O
5
58A Shutterless cassette (drawout only) S S S S S
58B
59A
Shuttered cassette (drawout only)
Silver-plated bus
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
O
S
5
5
59B Tin-plated bus O O O O O
61A UPS device — O — — —
61B UPS 120 Vac terminal block input — O — — —
80A Emergency (S2) inhibit contact C — C C C
5
Monitoring Outputs
5
81A General alarm indication contact C — C C C
81B
81C
ATS not in automatic
ATS in test
C
C
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C 5
81D Engine test aborted C — C C C
81E
81F
Cooldown in process
Engine start contact status
C
C
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
81G Emergency inhibit on C — C C C
81GL
81H
Emergency inhibit on with white indicating light 2
ATS on bypass
O
C
—
—
O
C
O
C
O
C
5
Inputs 5
81J Lockout C — C C C
81K
81L
Monitor mode
Remote load test
C
C
—
—
C
C
C
C
C
C
5
Three Source ATS Control (Master/Slave)
5
90A Master control output C — C C C
90B Slave input C — C C C
5
S = Standard, O = Optional, C = Configurable
Notes 5
1 Add feature package B or C (i.e., 51S4B).

B: LED indication + audible alarm, Form C contact, EMI/RFI filtering (standard)

C: B + surge counter with Reset button (standard with surge)
5
5
2 When these options are selected with the ATC-900 controller, the associated input or output will be factory fixed and cannot be reconfigured by the user.

5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-115

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

Feature Description
5
Timers 5H. Three-Phase Rotation 6C. Remote Engine Test 7. Time Delay Emergency
5 1. Time Delay Normal to Protection (INPUT) Fail (TDEF)
Emergency (TDNE) Provides three-phase reversal Provides an input to initiate a Provides a time delay that
5 Provides a time delay to allow sensing in order to protect
against transferring to an out-
test to simulate a loss of the
Source 1 as standard. All
prevents a connected
emergency source from
for the generator to warm up
5 before transferring the load to
the emergency source.
of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source
programmed time delays
(TDNE, TDEN, etc.) will be
being declared “unavailable”
based on the customer’s set
as unavailable if the sources performed as part of the test. points. This is to account for
5 Timing begins only after the
Emergency Source becomes are out of phase, based on Engine run time of the test is momentary generator
available and is deemed good programmable set points in equal to the plant exerciser fluctuations. If the Source
5 based on the programmable the controller. programmed set point. All 2 remains in a failed state,
voltage and frequency set tests are fail-safe protected. then 0.5 seconds after the
5J. All-Phase Undervoltage/
5 points in the controller. Underfrequency Protection
The test is initiated via
remote momentary contact
TDEF timer expires the
transfer switch will proceed
2. Time Delay Engine Start Provides undervoltage/
5
closure. with the programmed
(TDES) underfrequency monitoring sequence for retransfer if
and protection based on 6D. Maintained 2 Position Source 1 is available.
Provides a time delay before
5 initiating the generator start programmable set points in Test Switch This time delay is only
cycle. This is to account for the controller. Provides a door-mounted implemented when
5 momentary power outages 5K. All-Phase Overvoltage/
2-position test switch marked
“Auto” and “Test”. Available
Source 2 is a generator.
or voltage fluctuations of the Overfrequency Protection Note: This feature is also enabled
5 normal source. Provides a
Form C contact to the
Provides overvoltage/
with ATC-900 controller only.
when large loads cause generator
overfrequency monitoring 6H. 4-Position Test Selector output to drop below customer
5 generator starter circuit.
and protection based on Switch (FPSS) set points.
3. Time Delay Emergency to programmable set points in Provides a door-mounted 4-
8. Time Delay Bypass Push-
5 Normal (TDEN) the controller. position, maintained contact
selector switch marked
button
Provides a time delay of the 5L. Three-Phase Voltage Provides a momentary
5 retransfer operation to permit
stabilization of the normal
Unbalance/Phase Loss
“Auto,” “Test,” “Engine
Start,” and “Off.” The FPSS contact pushbutton to
Provides phase loss detection is fail-safe protected, except bypass the TDNE (Feature 1)
5 source. Timing begins only
after the normal source
from blown fuses on the for the “Off Position.” and/or TDEN (Feature 3) time
delays. The Time Delay
Source 2 supply circuit. Transfer switch operation is
becomes available and is
5 deemed good based on the 5M. All Phase Voltage
determined by the switch Bypass Pushbutton contact,
when closed, will reduce any
programmable voltage and position. Transfer switch
Phase Loss or all of the programmed time
5 frequency set points in the Provides phase loss detection on
operations are as follows:
delay to zero. Must be
controller. This function is fail- the Source 2 supply circuit. “Auto”—Automatic operation executed when TDNE or
5 safe protected.
6B. Test Operators
mode. TDEN timer is displayed on
4. Time Delay Engine the controller.
“Test”—A load test is
5 Cooldown (TDEC) Automatic transfer switches
are provided with a controller performed until the switch is 8C. Bypass Time Delay
Provides a time delay before faceplate test pushbutton moved to another position. Emergency to Normal
5 initiating the generator stop that simulates a loss of the “Engine Start”—A no-load
(TDEN)
cycle after the retransfer Source 1 as standard. All
5 operation. This allows the
generator to cool down by
programmed time delays
test is performed until the
switch is moved to another
8D. Bypass Time Delay
Normal to Emergency
(TDNE, TDEN, etc.) will be position. (TDNE)
5 running unloaded. Timing
begins on completion of the
performed as part of the test.
Engine run time of the test is “Off”—The automatic 8E. Bypass TDNE/TDEN
retransfer cycle.
5 Source 2 Sensing
equal to the plant exerciser
programmed set point. All
transfer controller and engine
start contact are disabled. A
(INPUT)
Provides input to bypass the
tests are fail-safe protected. white pilot light is provided to
5 5. Source 2—Monitoring
and Protection
indicate that the FPSS is in
TDNE (Feature 1) and/or
TDEN (Feature 2) time
the “Off” position. delays. The Time Delay
5 Provides monitoring and
protection based on the
Bypass Pushbutton contact,
when closed, will reduce any
5 Source 2 voltage and/or
frequency set points. All
or all of the programmed time
delay to zero. Must be
Feature 5 monitoring and
5 protection functions are fail-
executed when TDNE or
TDEN timer is displayed on
safe operations.
5
the controller. The bypass
time delay feature is initiated
via remote momentary
5 contact closure.

V2-T5-116 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
8F. Bypass Timers— 10B. Preferred Source 12L. Source 1 Trip 14L. Source 1 Present
External Pushbutton Input Selector Indication Provides 2 Form C relay 5
Provides an input from a Provides a programmable The automatic transfer auxiliary contacts. The relay is
customer supplied external source selector for use on controller display will read energized when Source 1 is 5
pushbutton to bypass or systems comprised of dual “Lockout” if the Source 1 present.
reduce the programmed time utility or utility and engine/ circuit breaker is in the
14M. Source 2 Present 5
delays to zero for TDEN and generator power sources. “tripped” position.
TDNE.
10C. Preferred Source 12M. Source 2 Trip
Provides 2 Form C relay
auxiliary contacts. The relay 5
9B. Maintenance Selector Selector with Selector Indication is energized when Source 2
Switch (MSS) Switch The automatic transfer is present. 5
Provides a 2-position, Provides a means to controller display will read
maintained contact selector designate either Source 1 or “Lockout” if the Source 15. Switch Position
Indication Contact
5
switch marked “Operate” Source 2 as the “Preferred” 2 circuit breaker is in the
and “Disable.” When the
MSS is placed in the
source via device panel
mounted selector switch
“tripped” position. Provides a contact that
indicates if the power 5
14. Relay Auxiliary Contacts switching device is in the
“Disable” position, the
controller logic will be
control. The “Preferred”
source is the source that the 14C. Source 1 Present “open” or “closed” position. 5
disconnected from the transfer switch will connect Provides 4 Form C relay
transfer motor circuit. the load to if it is available. auxiliary contacts. The relay is
15E. Source 1 Position
Indication Contact
5
The MSS is placed in the energized when Source 1 is
“Operate” position for
normal automatic operation.
10D. Preferred Source
Selector
present. Provides 1 Form C contact
that indicates the position of 5
14D. Source 2 Present the Source 1 power switching
9C. Monitor Mode Selector
Provides a programmable
source selector for use on Provides 4 Form C relay device. 5
Switch systems comprised of dual auxiliary contacts. The relay is
Provides a 2-position selector engine/generator power energized when Source 2 is
15F. Source 2 Position
Indication Contact
5
switch to enable/disable sources. (Dual engine starting present.
Monitor Mode on the circuits are provided.)
14E. Source 1 Available
Provides 1 Form C contact
that indicates the position of 5
controller. When enabled, the
12C. Source 1—Load the Source 2 power
controller will monitor the
availability, connected state Connected
Provides 1 Form C relay
auxiliary contact. The relay is switching device. 5
and voltage conditions and Provides a green indication energized when Source 1 is
will initiate a transfer. that indicates the load is available and within the
15G. Source 1 Position
Indication Contact
5
connected to Source 1 controller’s programmable
10. Preferred Source
Selector
when lit. set points. Provides 3 Form C contact
that indicates the position of
5
12D. Source 2—Load 14F. Source 2 Available Source 1 power switching
Provides a means to
designate either Source 1 or Connected Provides 1 Form C relay device. 5
Source 2 as the “Preferred” Provides a red indication that auxiliary contact. The relay is
source. The “Preferred” indicates the load is energized when Source 2 is
15H. Source 2 Position
Indication Contact
5
source is the source that the connected to Source 2 available and within the
transfer switch will connect when lit. controller’s programmable Provides 3 Form C contact
that indicates the position of
5
the load to if it is available. set points.
12G. Source 1—Present Source 1 power switching
Note: This is a programmable Provides a white or amber 14G. Source 1 Present device. 5
software feature not an actual indication “Depending on the Provides 2 Form C relay
switch. Controller” that Source 1 has auxiliary contacts. The relay is
15K. Normal (S1) Breaker
Position Indication 1 Form C
5
power; however, this does energized when Source 1 is
10A. Preferred Source
Selector (INPUT)
not indicate whether Source present.
(Output)
Provides 1 Form C contact of
5
1 is acceptable.
14H. Source 2 Present the breaker indicating the
Provides a means to
designate either Source 1 or 12H. Source 2—Present Provides 2 Form C relay breaker position. 5
Source 2 as the “Preferred” Provides an amber indication auxiliary contacts. The relay is
source using a remote that Source 2has power; energized when Source 2 is
15L. Normal (S1) Breaker
Position Indication 2 Form C
5
contact or device panel however, this does not present.
mounted contact closure. The indicate whether Source 2
14J. Source 1 Present
(Output)
Provides 2 Form C contact of
5
“Preferred” source is the is acceptable.
5
source that the transfer Provides 4 Form C relay the breaker indicating the
switch will connect the load Overcurrent Trip Indication auxiliary contacts. The relay is breaker position.
to if it is available. Available only with integral energized when Source 1 is
overcurrent protection present. 5
(Feature 16) (shown on
automatic transfer controller
display).
14K. Source 2 Present
5
Provides 4 Form C relay
auxiliary contacts. The relay is
energized when Source 2 is
5
present.
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-117

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

15M. Source 2 Load Shed 17N. Normal (S1) Breaker IQ 140 21A. Optional Power Cable
5 Contacts with Eaton 310+ Trip Unit In addition to basic current Connection Terminals
Provides 4 Form C contacts The UL 1008 integrated and voltage, will provide Eaton transfer switches are
5 to initiate a load circuit service entrance rated frequency, power provided as standard with
disconnect while on Source 2. contactor design has a measurements real, reactive Source 1, Source 2 and load
5 This gives the user the 100% load rating. and apparent power, total
(W, VAR, VA). Optional
circuit solderless screw-type
capability of selectively terminals for power cable
18. Metering
5 choosing not to run certain
loads while on Source 2. The ATS controller provides
communication RS-485,
Modbus RTU.
connection. Alternate
terminal wire sizes, and
voltage and frequency
5 15R. Normal (S1) Source readings. If additional IQ 150
In addition to basic current/
compression lug provisions
may be available dependent on
Position 1 Form C (Relay metering functions are transfer switch type and
5 OUTPUT) required, Eaton offers a voltage/frequency and power
readings, will provide Energy ampere rating.
Provides 1 Form C relay series of digital meters that
Real reactive and apparent
5 contact that indicates the
position of the Source 1
may be added to the ATS.
The meter type can provide (Wh, VAR, VAh). Optional
Plant Exerciser
communication RS-485, 23A. Plant Exerciser With
5 power switching device. simple current and voltage
Modbus RTU. Fail-Safe
readings or more capable
15S. Emergency (S2) meters providing Power, Provides a means for
IQ 250/260 (Option 18a)
5 Source Position 1 Form C
(Relay OUTPUT)
Demand and energy automatic testing of the
readings. IQ 250 engine generator set or
5 Provides 1 Form C relay
contact that indicates the Available with an optional
This digital meter provides
current per phase and current
standby power system. All
programmed time delays in
communications interface. the controller will be performed
5 position of the Source 2
power switching device. (See Feature 48—
demand, voltage (L-L, L-N)
and frequency. Power, energy during plant exerciser
Communications for available and demand readings. Real, operations.
5 16B. Integral Overcurrent
Protection on Both Power
communication modules.) reactive and apparent power
Programmable set points for
Feature 18 metering options and energy, power factor.
5 Source Switching Devices
Provides integral overcurrent include all required external RS-485 communications,
test intervals are start time,
either disabled, daily, 7, 14
devices (CTs, etc.) for a fully Modbus RTU or ASCII.
or 28 days.
5 protection on both Source 1
and Source 2 power functioning metering system. Optional I/O slots available.
15-minute fixed engine test
switching devices. IQ 260
5
18J. Integrated Metering time.
(LOAD Side) In addition to all of the
16E. Integral Overcurrent features of the IQ 250, power Test may be performed with
This metering option
5 Protection on the Source
2 Power Switching Device incorporates basic load
quality analysis is available
with THD voltage and current
or without load transfer. Test
metering into the ATC-900 may be manually cancelled
Provides integral overcurrent
5 protection on the Source using the add-on DCT
per phase. during the operation. This
function is fail-safe protected.
2 power switching device. module. In addition to the Power Xpert 2000
5 16N. Integral Overcurrent
standard voltage and
frequency metering, the DCT
(Option 18e) 23K. Plant Exerciser With
Provides either a Power Xpert Fail-Safe
5 Protection on the Source 1
Power Switching Device
module adds current, real
power, reactive power,
PXM 2250, PXM 2260 or Provides a means for
PXM 2270 meter. automatic testing of the
Provides integral overcurrent apparent power, and power
5 protection on the Source 1 factor. This option also Power Xpert 4000, 6000, 8000
engine generator set or
standby power system. All
power switching device. enables the selective load (Option 18b) programmed time delays in
5 16S. External Overcurrent
shed feature (option 45L).
Provides one of the Power the controller will be performed
IQ 130/140/150 Xpert Meters with or without during plant exerciser
5
Protection on the Source 1
Power Switching Device (Option 18d) graphic displays. operations.
Provides overcurrent
5 protection on the Source 1
IQ 130
This digital meter provides
20A. Rear Bus Provisions
Provides Source 1, Source
Programmable set points for
test intervals are start time,
power switching device. either disabled, daily, 7, 14 or
5 17. Breaker with an
basic current and voltage per
phase (L-L, L-N) and min./
2 and Load Circuit rear
accessible bus stabs with 28 days, engine test time.
Overcurrent Trip Unit max. readings (I, V). Optional provision for bus bar
5 communication RS-485, connection. Eaton transfer
Test may be performed with
or without load transfer. Test
17H. Padlockable Handle Modbus RTU. switches are provided with may be manually cancelled
5 Lock Hasp either front or rear during the operation. This
Provides a means to padlock (dependent on switch type) function is fail-safe protected.
5 the breaker supplied only on a
service entrance rated
connected solderless screw-
type terminals for power
contactor based design. The
5
cable connection as standard.
padlock kit is provided as a
ship loose item and able to be
5 customer mounted as a
mechanical means to lock out
5 the breaker.

V2-T5-118 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
23M. Selectable—Disabled, 26E. Go to Emergency (S2) 29. Transfer Operation 29K. Manual Retransfer
7, 14, 28 or Day Interval, or Input with Selector Switch Modes (INPUT) 5
Calendar Date, 0–600 Provides a device panel Provides standard or optional Provides an input to remotely
Minutes, Load/No Load, mounted selector switch transfer modes, mode initiate a manual retransfer 5
with Fail-safe labeled, “Auto/Go to Source selection devices and from Source 2 to Source 1.
Provides a means for 2”, to initiate a transfer to the operational methods for
29L. Manual Retransfer 5
automatic testing of the Source 2 power source. This transfer switches.
On/Off (INPUT)
engine generator set or
standby power system. All
includes starting the
generator, performing the 29D. Dual ATS Bypass Provides an input to remotely 5
Provides an active controller enable or disable the manual
5
programmed time delays in programmed time delays and
the controller will be the transfer operation. while the bypass isolation retransfer feature.
performed during plant Retransfer will occur when switch is in the bypass mode.
exerciser operations. the external contact is
29G. Automatic/Manual
29M. Manual Retransfer
On/Off Input with Selector
5
Programmable set points for opened. This is a fail-safe
Operation With Selector Switch
test intervals are start time,
engine test time and either
function.
Switch Provides a device panel 5
26H. Three-Phase Rotation Provides 2-position selector mounted selector switch to
disabled, daily, 7, 14 or 28
days or up to 12 specific Protection switch (labeled Auto/manual) enable or disable the manual 5
calendar dates. Test may be Provides three-phase reversal that permits selection of retransfer feature. Selection
performed with or without sensing in order to protect automatic or manual initiated of this option automatically 5
load transfer. Test may be against transferring to an out- transfer. When in the “Auto” adds option 29J.
manually cancelled during the of-phase source. The controller
will treat the opposite source
position, the transfer switch
controller initiates a transfer, 32. Delayed Transition 5
operation. This function is fail- Transfer Modes for Open
safe protected. This feature
includes independent time
as unavailable if the sources
are out of phase, based on
retransfer and generator
startup and shutdown. When Transition Transfer 5
in the “Manual” position, Switches
programmable set points in
delays for time delay normal
to emergency, time delay the controller. the operator is required to Provides delayed transition 5
initiate generator start/stop transfer modes for an open
emergency to normal and
time delay for engine
26J. All-Phase
Undervoltage/
and a transfer/retransfer transition transfer switch.
Often used in systems with
5
cooldown. using a door-mounted
5
Underfrequency Protection 3-position selector switch inductive loads, a delayed
Source 1 Sensing Provides all-phase (Source 1–Off–Source 2). transition transfer switch may
undervoltage/underfrequency prevent or reduce inrush
26. Source 1—Monitoring
and Protection monitoring and protection
Note: Transfer switches with
Feature 29 must be labeled as
currents due to out-of-phase 5
based on programmable set switching of inductive loads.
Provides Source 1 monitoring
and protection functions. If
points in the controller.
non-automatic transfer switch
equipment. 32A. Time Delay Neutral 5
Source 1 fails, then the
automatic transfer controller
26K. All-Phase Overvoltage/
Overfrequency Protection
29J. Automatic Transfer or
Provides a time delay in the
neutral position during the 5
will begin the sequence of Automatic Transfer With
Provides all-phase transfer and retransfer
operations necessary to overvoltage/overfrequency
Non-Automatic
Retransfer Operation
operations during which both 5
transfer the load to Source 2. monitoring and protection Source 1 and Source 2 are
All Feature 26 monitoring and
protection functions are fail-
based on programmable set
Provides a field-selectable
programmable set point that
disconnected from the load 5
points in the controller. circuit. This allows inductive
permits the transfer switch to
safe operations.
26L. Three-Phase Voltage operate in one of the following
loads time to reach a safe
voltage and eliminate back
5
26D. Go to Emergency Unbalance/ Phase Loss two transfer modes (A or B):
5
(Source 2) EMF. The time delay is
Provides phase loss detection A. Fully automatic programmable and is the
Provides the capability for an from blown fuses on the same for both transfer and
external contact closure to
initiate a transfer to the
Source 1.
operation.
retransfer operations. This 5
B. Automatic engine/ is a passive feature that
Source 2 power source. This
includes starting the
26M. All-Phase Voltage
Phase Loss
generator startup and
automatic transfer
requires the consulting
engineer/installer to
5
generator, performing the Provides phase loss detection on
programmed time delays and the Source 1 supply circuit.
operation from Source 1
to Source 2. Manual
determine the settings
based on how the user 5
the transfer operation. pushbutton operation is will operate the facility.
Retransfer will occur when 26N. All-Phase
Undervoltage Protection
required to initiate the Adjustable 0–120 seconds. 5
the external contact is retransfer operation
opened. This is a fail-safe
function.
Provides undervoltage
protection for Source 1
and engine/generator 5
shutdown. The
(ATC-100 Controller only). pushbutton for manual
retransfer operation is
5
included. This is fail-safe
protected. 5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-119

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

32B. Load Voltage Decay 32D. In-Phase Transition If the synchronization does 35C. Pre-/Post-Transfer
5 Provides load voltage With Default to Time Delay not occur within a specified Signal (OUTPUT)
measurement to sense back Neutral amount of time, the Alarm Provides a Form C contact
5 EMF that is generated when Provides in-phase transition, relay will energize and the signal prior to and after a
the transfer switch is the which is a feature that will failure will be logged into the transfer from S1 to S2 or S2
5 neutral position. It provides a permit a transfer or retransfer transfer history as either
“Sync Fail - Freq” or “Sync
back to S1. Will not transfer
delay in transfer in either only between two available until the programmable delay
5 direction if an unacceptable
level is sensed as established
sources that have a phase
angle difference near zero.
Fail - Phase” depending on
whether the frequency
set point in the controller is
reached. If both sources are
difference or the phase
5 by a programmed set point.
This is an active feature that
The in-phase transition
feature includes permissible difference was excessive.
not available, this option will
ignore the time delay set in
adapts to how the facility is frequency difference and the controller. The time delay
5 operating in order to minimize synchronization time set
32G. Time Delay Neutral
This feature provides a time
is programmable for 0–120
neutral position wait time, but points. In the event Source 1 seconds pre transfer and
5 ensure safety. Adjustable
2–30% of nominal voltage.
and Source 2 fail to delay in the neutral position
during the transfer and
0–120 seconds post transfer.
synchronize within the
retransfer operations during 35D. Post-Transfer Signal
5 32C. In-Phase Transition
permitted frequency
difference and time, then the which both the utility source with 1 Form C Contact
With Default to Load controller defaults to the time and the generator source are Provides a Form C output
5 Voltage Decay delay neutral operation as disconnected from the load from the ATC-900 to signal
Provides in-phase transition, described in Feature 32A. circuit. TDN cannot be that the switch did transfer.
5 which is a feature that will Adjustable frequency implemented on a transfer
switch using a 2-position
The time delay is programmable
permit a transfer or retransfer difference 0.0–3.0 Hz. for 0–120 seconds but does
5 between two available
sources that have a phase
Adjustable synchronization
time allowance 1–60
contactor. not start to count down until
connected to the new source.
Jumper selectable at disable
angle difference near zero.
5 The in-phase transition
minutes. (0 seconds) or enable
(2 seconds).
36. Load Shed From
feature includes permissible 32E. Delayed Transition Emergency / Source 2
5 frequency difference and The transfer and retransfer Logic Extender Cable Inhibit (INPUT)
synchronization time set operations during which both Provides the capability for an
5 points. In the event Source 1
and Source 2 fail to
Source 1 and Source 2
are disconnected from the
34A. 48 Inches (1219 mm)
Provides logic extension
external NC contact to initiate
a load circuit disconnection
from the Source 2 power
5 synchronize within the
permitted frequency
load circuit. The time delay is
programmable and the same
cable with connectors.
source. If the load circuit is
difference and time, then the for both transfer and retransfer 34C. 96 Inches (2438 mm) connected to Source 2 and
5 controller defaults to the load operation. Adjustable 3–60 Provides logic extension the contact is opened, then a
voltage decay operation as seconds. cable with connectors. retransfer to Source 1 is
5 described in Feature 32B.
32F. In-Phase Transition 34E. 144 Inches (3658 mm)
completed if Source 1 is
available. If Source 1 is not
Adjustable frequency
5 difference 0.0–3.0 Hz. Provides in-phase transition, Provides logic extension available, then the transfer
Adjustable synchronization this feature will permit a cable with connectors. switch will transfer to neutral.
transfer or retransfer If the load circuit is connected
5 time allowance 1–60
minutes. between two available
34F. 100 Inches (2540 mm)
to Source 1 and the contact is
sources that have a phase Provides logic extension only open, then a transfer Source
5 angle difference of 8 degrees for open Magnum ATS. 2 is prohibited.
or less. The in-phase transition 35A. Pre-Transfer Signal 36A. Load Shed / Source 2
5 feature includes permissible
frequency difference and
with 1 Form C Contact Inhibit with Keyed Switch
Provides a signal prior to the (INPUT)
5 synchronization time set
points. In the event Source 1
transferring of the load. Will Provides a device panel
not transfer until the mounted selector switch to
and Source 2 fail to
5 synchronize within the
programmable delay set point
in the controller is reached.
initiate a load circuit
permitted frequency disconnection from the
5 difference and time, the
The pre-transfer time delay
option, if both sources are
Source 2 power source. If the
load circuit is connected to
Alarm relay will energize and
not available, will ignore the
5 “Failed to Sync” will be
displayed on Line 1 of the
time delay set in the
Source 2 and the selector
switch is switched to the
controller. “S2 Inhibit/Enabled” position,
controller. After resetting the
5 alarm, another in-phase then a retransfer to Source 1
transition may be attempted or is completed if Source 1 is
5 a non-synchronized transfer available. If Source 1 is not
may be initiated by failing the available, then the transfer
5 connected source. The
adjustable frequency
switch will transfer to neutral.
If the load circuit is connected
5 difference is 0.0 to 3.0 Hz. to Source 1 and the switch is
in the “S2 Inhibit” position,
then a transfer Source 2 is
5 prohibited.

V2-T5-120 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
37. Go to Neutral (not SE 39A. 225 A With (2) 200 A 45L. Selective Load Shed 47D. Closed Transition
Rated) (INPUT) Feeders Provides an output contact Provides a closed transition 5
Provides an input to transfer a that opens to shed a transfer as the primary
three-position transfer switch
39B. 300 A With (3) 200 A
Feeders customer load if the transfer mode. Only under 5
from either of the connected measured kW value exceeds a fail-safe condition (i.e., loss
sources to the off or neutral 39C. 400 A With (4) 200 A the load shed kW set point of the connected source) will 5
position. This features applies Feeders value. The load will be picked the controller transfer to the
only to those transfer
switches with three-position 41. Space Heater With
up if the load restore set point
is attained.
alternate source using the
load voltage decay operation
5
Thermostat
5
power device using a remote as described in Feature 32B.
contact closure. When the Provides a space heater and 47. Transfer Modes for Adjustable frequency
signal is removed, the adjustable thermostat. Closed Transition Transfer difference 0.0–0.3 Hz.
transfer switch will transfer External control power is Switches Adjustable voltage difference 5
back to the available, not required. Availability is Provides available transition 1–5% V.
preferred source. dependent on transfer switch
type.
transfer modes for a closed
transition transfer switch. 47E. Closed Transition With 5
Service Equipment Rated Default to In-Phase Transi-
5
Closed transition is a “make
Transfer Switch 41A. Space Heater With before break” transfer and tion With Default to
Provides the label “suitable Thermostat—100 Watt retransfer scheme that will Time Delay Neutral
for use as service equipment” Provides 100-watt space parallel (a maximum of 100 Provides a closed transition 5
and the features necessary to heater with an adjustable ms) Source 1 and Source 2 transfer as the primary
meet the requirements for
the label. Includes service
thermostat. providing a seamless transfer
when both sources are
transfer mode. In the event
Source 1 and Source 2 fail to
5
41E. Space Heater With
disconnect with visible
indication and neutral
Thermostat—375 Watt
available. The closed
transition feature includes
synchronize within the
permitted voltage difference,
5
assembly with removable Provides 375-watt space permissible voltage difference frequency difference, phase
link. Feature 16B or 16N heater with an adjustable frequency difference and angle difference and time, 5
must be selected separately thermostat. synchronization time then the controller defaults to
for a molded case or power 42. Seismic Qualification allowance set points. The the in-phase transition with 5
circuit breaker design and phase angle difference default to time delay neutral
45. Load Sequencing
17N for a service rated
contactor design. Capability
between the two sources
must be near zero for a
operation as described in
Features 32D and 32A.
5
Provides the capability for
37A. Service Equipment sequential closure of up to 10
permitted transfer. These
are all programmable set
Adjustable frequency
difference 0.0–0.3 Hz. 5
Rated Transfer Switch addressable relays after a points in the controller. Adjustable voltage difference
Without Ground
Fault Protection
transfer. Each addressable
47C. Closed Transition With
1–5 percent volts. Adjustable 5
relay provides (1) Form C synchronization time
Provides service equipment
rating for an application that
contact. A single adjustable
time delay between each
Default to In-Phase Transi-
tion With Default to Load
allowance 1–60 minutes. 5
Voltage Decay
does not require ground fault
protection.
of the relay closures is
provided. Operates via a sub- Provides a closed transition 5
network. Adjustable 1–120 transfer as the primary
37B. Service Equipment
Rated Transfer Switch With
seconds. transfer mode. In the event 5
Source 1 and Source 2 fail to
Ground Fault Protection
Provides service equipment
45A–J. Load Sequencing
Contacts
synchronize within the 5
permitted voltage difference,
(1–10) (OUTPUT)
rating for an application that
requires ground fault Provides the capability for
frequency difference, phase
angle difference and time,
5
protection. sequential contact closure of
up to 10 contacts after a
then the controller defaults to
the in-phase transition with 5
38. Steel Cover transfer. A single adjustable default to load voltage decay
Provides protection for a
device panel as option 38a
time delay between each of operations as described in 5
the relay closures is provided. Feature 32C and 32B.
and protection for the
controller as option 38b.
Operates using the
configurable output contacts
Adjustable frequency 5
difference 0.0–0.3 Hz.
39. Distribution Panel
(Form C). Adjustable 0–120
seconds. Each individual
Adjustable voltage difference
1–5% volts. Adjustable
5
The distribution panel feature configurable contact has its synchronization time
uses a panelboard design
with bolt-on circuit breakers
own adjustable time delay. allowance 1–60 minutes. 5
When more than one contact
type EHD. Bolt-on breakers
are designed to hold up to the
is supplied, they start the
timing sequence at the
5
changes in temperature and
humidity that an industrial
same time.
5
application calls for. (240/
120 Vac single-phase 5
systems only.)
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-121

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

47F. Closed/Load Voltage 47H. Parallel Limit Timer 48RAC. Remote Option 51. Surge
5 Decay Provides an independent Annunciator with Control Protection Device
Controllers equipped with timing relay with NO contact Provides remote monitoring Two types of surge
5 Feature Set 47F will perform (watchdog timer) activated and control via a color touch protection devices are used in
a closed transition when both only during a closed transition screen display for the Eaton automatic transfer
5 sources are synchronized in transfer. The timing is set to controllers. Operates using switches. Both types meet
frequency, phase and 100 ms per code requirements Modbus protocol (MPONI the requirements for UL 1449
5 voltage. Failure to
synchronize will result in an
and will initiate a contact
closure that can be used by
required for the ATC-600/
800).
3rd Edition for surge
suppression devices and are
5 open transition Time Delay
Load Voltage Decay transfer.
the end user to annunciate an
alarm or to trip an upstream 48U. USB Port for Memory
CE marked. The type CVX is
used on Eaton wallmount
Time Delay Load Voltage breaker. Stick ATS designs and the Eaton
5 Decay uses the load voltage
48. Communication
Provides a device panel type SPD are used on
measurements to sense back mounted USB port for floor-standing designs.
5 EMF that is generated when
the transfer switch is in the
Modules
Provides communications
uploading or downloading
controller set points and for CVX

5 Neutral position. modules for the transfer

switch controllers.
downloading event history. The CVX device features a
Thermally Protected Metal
It provides a delay in transfer 49. Sensing Isolation Oxide Varistor technology
5 in either direction if an 48D. Ethernet
Communication
Transformer and comes with high
unacceptable level is sensed Provides a set of control intensity LED phase status
5 as established by a customer
programmed level. The
(PXG900 Gateway)
Translates Modbus RTU,
power transformers that
converts the delta system
indicators.
SPD
5 transfer will not take place
until the back EMF decays
QCPort or INCOM to Modbus
TCP. The PXG900 Gateway
sensing to a wye sensing
input to the controller. The The SPD features a
below the acceptable includes embedded Web sensing isolation transformer Thermally Protected Metal
5 programmed level. This server monitoring of up to is recommended for high Oxide Varistor technology.
feature has a separate setting 64 connected devices. resistance grounded systems It comes with dual-colored
5 of enabling or disabling the
operation. If disabled, the 48F. Modbus
and for grounded delta protection status indicators
systems. for each phase and for
Communication (MPONI)
5 transfer switch will not delay
in the Neutral position and Provides Modbus RTU 49A. Sensing Isolation
neutral-ground protection
mode. It comes with an
will transfer between the protocol via communications Transformer audible alarm with silence
5 sources as fast as possible. module. Option 49A is available for button and a Form C contact.
This feature is not available Magnum ATSs.
5 with the Time Delay Neutral
48G. Modbus TCP/IP
Provides a third-party device 49B. Sensing Isolation
An optional SPD with surge
counter feature package is
Optional Feature 32A.
Transformer
5 47G. Closed/Time Delay
for Modbus 485 to Modbus
TCP/IP pass through. Option 49B is available for
available. This provides six-
digit surge counter with reset
Neutral MCCB and contactor transfer button.
5 Controllers equipped with
48M1–48M4. I/O Module switches.
51S1B. 50 kA—SPD standard
Feature Set 47F will perform Each I/O module provides
5 a closed transition transfer four additional user
configurable inputs and
49C. Multi-Tap Control
Power Transformer
source 1
when both sources are 51S2B. 80 kA—SPD standard
5 synchronized in frequency,
phase and voltage. Failure to
outputs. Up to four additional
I/O modules can be added,
The multi-tap control power
transformer is used to step-
source 1
either by the factory or in the down voltage to 120 Vac for 51S3B. 100 kA—SPD
5 synchronize will result in an
open transition Time Delay field. the transfer switch control standard source 1
Neutral transfer. Time Delay circuit. Incoming voltage can
5 Neutral provides a time delay
48MRAC. Multi-view
Remote Annunciator with
be adjusted by moving the 51S4B. 120 kA—SPD
standard source 1
in the transfer switch neutral tap on the primary side from
Control
5 position when both sources
Provides remote monitoring
208 V, 240 V or 480 V for
60 Hz applications or 220 V,
51S5B. 160 kA—SPD
are open. This delay takes standard source 1
of source availability, source
5 place when the load is
transferred in either direction position and test status for up
380 V, 415 V, 600 V for 50 Hz
applications. 51S6B. 200 kA—SPD
to eight transfer switches standard source 1
5 to prevent excessive in-rush
currents due to out-of-phase with the ATC-300+ or ATC-
51S7B. 250 kA—SPD
switching of large motor 900 controller. Operates
5 loads. using Modbus protocol. standard source 1

48P. Remote Annunciator 51S8B. 300 kA—SPD

5 Power Supply standard source 1
Provides a remote mounted 51S9B. 400 kA—SPD
5 power supply providing DC standard source 1
power to the remote
5 annunciator. 51S1C. 50 kA—SPD standard
with surge counter source 1

V2-T5-122 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features
5.9
51S2C. 80 kA—SPD standard 59b. Tin-Plated Bus 61F. Power Loss Buffer 81G. LOAD SHED—
with surge counter source 1 Tin-plated bus is available as ATC Comm (Requires DCT S2 Inhibit On (OUTPUT) 5
an option for Magnum-based Module) Provides remote indication
51S3C. 100 kA—SPD
standard with surge counter designs. Provides ride-through power that the emergency inhibit 5
source 1 for the ATC-900 controller to is on.
60. Dedicated Voltage
Control Power Transformer
maintain communications
81GL. LOAD SHED— 5
51S4C. 120 kA—SPD during a power loss. The
S2 Inhibit On with White
standard with surge counter
source 1
The dedicated voltage control
power transformer can be
power loss buffer provides
24 Vdc to the controller Indicating Light 5
selected for 208/240 V (requires the DCT module). Provides a 30 mm pilot light
51S5C. 160 kA—SPD systems where an added on the transfer switch device 5
standard with surge counter buffer is preferred between 80A. Load Shed From panel to indicate that
source 1 the incoming power and the Emergency / Source 2
Inhibit (INPUT)
S2 Inhibit is on. 5
micro-processor controller’s
51S6C. 200 kA—SPD 81H. ATS on Bypass
standard with surge counter
control power input. Identical to option 36 and
includes wiring from (OUTPUT) 5
source 1 61A. UPS Device with Provides remote indication
5
controller to terminal block.
Terminal Block Input that the bypass switch is
51S7C. 250 kA—SPD
Provides a factory mounted 81A. General Alarm Contact carrying the load.
standard with surge counter
source 1 and wired UPS sized to (OUTPUT)
81J. Lockout
5
provide power to the ATC Provides a remote indication
51S8C. 300 kA—SPD
standard with surge counter
controller and the bypass
isolation logic controller.
that an alarm condition exists
on the ATC-900. Remains on
Provides an input to
temporarily disable automatic 5
source 1 control. This feature is used
Inputs to the UPS are wired
out to a terminal block.
until all alarms are resolved
and reset at the controller. to indicate a tripped breaker 5
51S9C. 400 kA—SPD in a breaker-based transfer
standard with surge counter
source 1
61B. UPS 120 Vac Ready,
Terminal Block Input
81B. ATS Not in Automatic
(OUTPUT)
switch. It is treated as an 5
alarm and the alarm must be
51SC8. Remote display panel Provides a terminal block
input only for customer
Provides remote indication
that the ATS is not in
reset to continue automatic
operation.
5
(8 feet standard)
51SC12. Remote display
supplied external mounted
UPS that provides power to
automatic mode.
81K. Monitor Mode 5
panel (12 feet) the logic controller supplied in 81C. ATS in Test (OUTPUT) Provides an input to disable
51SC4. Remote display panel
bypass isolation switches. Provides remote indication automatic control in the ATC- 5
that the ATS is currently 900 controller. This function
(4 feet) 61C. Power Loss Buffer for
ELC
running a test. The test could
be initiated by the device
is used for when manual
operation is required. The
5
54. Front Access
54A. Front access cabinet
Provides ride-through power
for the ELC contained in
panel engine test pushbutton
or automatically using the
controller continues to
accurately monitor source 5
available for all Magnum automatic transfer switches programmed engine status and set points can be
products. This option will
add an additional pull section
with bypass isolation. This exerciser. changed; however, no action 5
feature does not provide will be initiated by the
mounted on the side of the
switch.
continuous power for 81D. Engine Test Aborted
(OUTPUT)
controller. 5
microprocessor controller.
81L. Remote Load Test
54B. Upgrade to 316
Stainless Steel
61D. UPS 120 Vac Ready,
Provides remote indication
that an engine test has been Provides an input to initiate a 5
Terminal Block Ready aborted. The ATC-900 event system test using a remote
Provides a stainless
enclosure with 316 grade.
Provides a terminal block log contains detailed event contact closure. The test will 5
input only for customer information that can help run based on the
Contact plant for availability. supplied external mounted assess the reason the test programmed engine test 5
55B. Source Swap (Normal UPS that provides power was aborted. settings in the controller.
Bottom/Emergency Top) to the ATC controller.
81E. Cooldown in Process
The settings include with or
without load, engine run time,
5
Provides ability to designate 61E. 24 Vdc Ready, Terminal (OUTPUT)
the Normal Source to be
physically located at the
Block Ready Provides remote indication
and independent test time
delays. 5
Provides a terminal block that an engine cooldown is in
bottom of the structure and
the Emergency Source to be
input only for customer progress. 5
supplied external 24 Vdc
at the top of the structure. 81F. Engine Start Contact
Contact plant for availability.
power to the ATC900
controller (requires the DCT Status (OUTPUT) 5
Provides remote indication
59a. Silver-Plated Bus
Silver-plated bus is a standard
Module).
that the engine start contact 5
is calling for the generator
feature for all Magnum-based
designs.
to start. 5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-123

 5.9 Transfer Switches
Standard and Optional Features

81M. Load Bank Control 90A. Master Control Glossary

5 (OUTPUT) (OUTPUT)
With respect to their use in Source 1 Failed or Fails—
Provides a remote output to Provides the user with the
5 disconnect a load bank if ability to use two
this document and as they
relate to switch operation, the
Source 1 is defined as “failed”
when it is outside of its
Source 1 fails while the load independent transfer following terminology undervoltage or overvoltage
5 bank is running. The load switches in three source is defined: or underfrequency or
bank control output is turned systems consisting of a utility overfrequency (if applicable)
5 on when an unloaded engine
test is in process and the load
and two generator sources. In
a three-source system, the
Available—A source is
defined as “available” when
set point ranges for the
nominal voltage and
it is within its undervoltage/
5 is connected to the source
that is not under test. It is off
Master ATS controls the
engine starting and stopping overvoltage/underfrequency/
frequency setting.
at all other times. If, while an of the Slave ATS. The slave overfrequency (if applicable) Source 2 Failed or Fails—
5 engine test is in process, the input receives the engine set point ranges for the Source 2 is defined as
non-test source fails (i.e., start signal from the Master nominal voltage and “failed” when it is outside
5 Source 1), the test is aborted,
which will cause load bank
controller. frequency setting. of its undervoltage or
overvoltage or under-
90B. Slave Control (INPUT) Fail-safe—A feature that
5 control relay to turn off in
anticipation of transferring The ATC-900 Master/Slave prevents disconnection from
frequency or overfrequency
(if applicable) set point ranges
controller functionality the only available source and for the nominal voltage and
load to the generator.
5 provides the user with the will also force a transfer
or retransfer operation to the
frequency setting for a time
81N. Health (OUTPUT) ability to use two exceeding 0.5 seconds after
5 Provides a remote indication independent transfer only available source. the time delay emergency fail
that an alarm condition or loss switches in three source Retransfer—Retransfer is (TDEF) time delay expires.
5 of control power exists on the
ATC-900. Remains on until an
systems consisting of a utility
and two generator sources. In
defined as a change of the Transfer—“Transfer” is
load connection from the defined as a change of the
alarm condition occurs or a three-source system, the
5 control power is lost. Master ATS controls the
secondary to primary source. load connection from the
engine starting and stopping Source 1—is the primary primary to secondary source
5 of the Slave ATS. The slave source or normal source or except when specifically
used as “Transfer to
input receives the engine normal power source or
5 start signal from the
Master controller.
normal. (Except when Source
2 has been designated the
Neutral.”
Transfer to Neutral—
5 “Preferred Source.”) “Transfer to Neutral” is
defined as when the load
Source 2—is the secondary
5 source or emergency source
or emergency power source
circuits are disconnected
from both Source 1 and
Source 2.
5 or emergency or standby or
backup source. (Except when
Source 2 has been
5 designated the “Preferred
Source.”)
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

V2-T5-124 Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com

 Transfer Switches
kW Conversions
5.10
kW Conversion Chart
5
kW to Ampere Conversion Chart
Three-Phase Ampere Table at Common Line-to-Line Voltage
5
kW 1 200 V 208 V 220 V 230 V 240 V 380 V 400 V 415 V 460 V 480 V 600 V
5
5.0 18 17 16 16 15 9 9 9 8 8 6
7.5 27 26 25 24 23 14 13 13 12 11 9 5
10.0 36 34 33 31 30 19 18 17 16 15 12
15.0 54 52 49 47 45 28 27 26 24 23 18 5
20.0
25.0
72
90
69
87
66
82
63
78
60
75
38
47
36
45
35
43
31
39
30
38
24
30
5
30.0 108 104 98 94 90 57 54 52 47 45 36 5
40.0 144 139 131 126 120 76 72 70 63 60 48
50.0 180 173 164 157 150 95 90 87 78 75 60 5
5
60.0 217 208 197 188 180 114 108 104 94 90 72
75.0 271 260 246 235 226 142 135 130 118 113 90
80.0 289 278 262 251 241 152 144 139 126 120 96
5
100.0 361 347 328 314 301 190 180 174 157 150 120
125.0 451 434 410 392 376 237 226 217 196 188 150 5
150.0 541 520 492 471 451 285 271 261 235 226 180
175.0 631 607 574 549 526 332 316 304 275 263 210 5
5
200.0 722 694 656 628 601 380 361 348 314 301 241
250.0 902 867 820 784 752 475 451 435 392 376 301
300.0 1083 1041 984 941 902 570 541 522 471 451 361
5
350.0 1263 1214 1148 1098 1052 665 631 609 549 526 421
400.0 1443 1388 1312 1255 1203 760 722 696 628 601 481 5
500.0 1804 1735 1640 1569 1504 950 902 870 784 752 601
600.0 2165 2082 1968 1883 1804 1140 1083 1043 941 902 722 5
700.0
800.0
2526
2887
2429
2776
2296
2624
2197
2510
2105
2406
1329
1519
1263
1443
1217
1391
1098
1255
1052
1203
842
962
5
900.0 3248 3123 2952 2824 2706 1709 1624 1565 1412 1353 1083 5
1000.0 3609 3470 3280 3138 3007 1899 1804 1739 1569 1503 1203

Note
5
5
1 At 0.8 power factor.

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

Volume 2—Commercial Distribution CA08100003E—February 2018 www.eaton.com V2-T5-125